general specifications

SERVICE MANUAL

FILE NO. 810-200882GR

15-inch Diagonal LCD TV/DVD

COMBINATION

15LV505

The above model is classified as a green product (*1), as indicated by the underlined serial number.

This Service Manual describes replacement parts for the green product. When repairing this green product, use the part(s) described in this manual and lead-free solder (*2).

For (1) and (2), see the next page.

DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, August, 2008 GREEN

(*1) GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT

The EC is actively promoting the WEEE & RoHS Directives that define standards for recycling and reuse of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment and for the Restriction of the use of cer tain Hazardous Substances. From July 1, 2006, the RoHS Directive will prohibit any marketing of new products containing the restricted substances.

Increasing attention is given to issues related to the global environmental. Toshiba Corporation recognizes environmental protection as a key management tasks, and is doing its utmost to enhance and improve the quality and scope of its environmental activities. In line with this,

Toshiba proactively promotes Green Procurement, and seeks to purchase and use products, parts and materials that have low environmental impacts.

Green procurement of parts is not only confined to manufacture. The same green parts used in manufacture must also be used as replacement parts.

(*2) LEAD-FREE SOLDER

This product is manufactured using lead-free solder as a part of a movement within the consumer products industry at large to be environmentally responsible. Lead-free solder must be used in the servicing and repair of this product.

WARNING

This product is manufactured using lead free solder.

DO NOT USE LEAD BASED SOLDER TO REPAIR THIS PRODUCT !

The melting temperature of lead-free solder is higher than that of leaded solder by 86

F to 104

F

(30

C to 40

C). Use of a soldering iron designed for lead-based solders to repair product made with lead-free solder may result in damage to the component and or PCB being soldered. Great care should be made to ensure high-quality soldering when servicing this product



especially when soldering large components, through-hole pins, and on PCBs



as the level of heat required to melt lead-free solder is high.

•

GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT

•

LEAD-FREE SOLDER

•

TABLE OF CONTENTS

•

OWNER'S MANUAL

CAUTION .....................................................................................................................................

A1-1

SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING ....................................................................................

A1-2

HOW TO ORDER PARTS ..........................................................................................................

A1-2

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .....................................................................................................

A1-3~A1-5

WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK ...............................................................................................

A1-6

DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY ............................................................

A1-7

PARENTAL CONTROL-RATING LEVEL ................................................................................

A1-7

REMOTE CONTROL KEY CODE ..............................................................................................

A1-8

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................

A2-1~A2-8

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1.REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P. C. BOARDS .............................................

B1-1, B1-2

2.REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS .....................................................................................

B2-1, B2-2

3.REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC ................................................

B3-1, B3-2

SERVICE MODE LIST .................................................................................................................

C-1

SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS .......................................................................................

C-2

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE ............................................................................................

C-2

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC .........................................................................

C-3

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS ..................................................................................................

D-1~D-5

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE .....................................................................................................

E-1~E-9

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

DVD ...........................................................................................................................................

F-1, F-2

POWER .....................................................................................................................................

F-3, F-4

POWER(DIGITAL PCB) ..........................................................................................................

F-5, F-6

SIGNAL .....................................................................................................................................

F-7, F-8

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

DVD MT .....................................................................................................................................

G-1, G-2

DIGITAL ....................................................................................................................................

G-3, G-4

POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON/SW .................................................................................

POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON .........................................................................................

G-7, G-8

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

G-5, G-6

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP .................................................................................................

H-1, H-2

MEMORY ...................................................................................................................................

H-3, H-4

MOTOR DRIVE .........................................................................................................................

H-5, H-6

AUDIO/VIDEO ..........................................................................................................................

H-7, H-8

MICON .......................................................................................................................................

H-9, H-10

SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO ..........................................................................................................

H-11, H-12

TUNER ......................................................................................................................................

H-13, H-14

HDMI ..........................................................................................................................................

H-15, H-16

LVDS ..........................................................................................................................................

H-17, H-18

SCALER POWER .....................................................................................................................

H-19, H-20

FLASH .......................................................................................................................................

H-21, H-22

DDR ...........................................................................................................................................

H-23, H-24

JACK ..........................................................................................................................................

H-25, H-26

AV SWITCH ..............................................................................................................................

H-27, H-28

REGULATOR ...........................................................................................................................

H-29, H-30

POWER .....................................................................................................................................

H-31, H-32

BACKLIGHT INVERTER .........................................................................................................

H-33, H-34

SOUND AMP ............................................................................................................................

H-35, H-36

JACK OUT ................................................................................................................................

H-37, H-38

SW .............................................................................................................................................

H-39, H-40

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................................................................................

H-41, H-42

WAVEFORMS ...............................................................................................................................

I-1, I-2

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW ..............................................................................................

J1-1~J1-3

DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW ...................................................................................................

J2-1

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ...........................................................................

K1-1

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ..............................................................................

K2-1

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ............................................................................

K3-1~K3-4

How to Obtain Warranty Services

If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and checking the section

“Troubleshooting,” you ﬁ nd that service is needed:

(1) For instructions on how to obtain warranty service for your LCD TV/DVD Combination, contact TACP · s Consumer Solution Center toll free at 1-800-631-3811.

(2) You must include a copy or original bill of sale or other proof of purchase along with the entire LCD TV/DVD Combination to the

Depot Warranty Repair Center speciﬁ ed by the TACP Consumer Solutions Center. You are responsible for all inbound transportation and insurance charges for the LCD TV/DVD

Combination to the Depot Warranty Repair

Center speciﬁ ed by the TACP Consumer

Solutions Center.

For additional information, visit TACP · s website: www.tacp.toshiba.com

ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF

ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION

OF THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH

ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY

WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY

STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS HEREBY LIMITED,

THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE

AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS, AND SIMILAR

OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO

THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY

PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL TACP BE LIABLE

FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR

MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED

DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY

TO USE THIS LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION).

No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change, modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever. The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or under any statute or law of the United States or any state thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90) days from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the defect. This limitation does not apply to implied warranties arising under state law.

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL

RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER

RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO

STATE IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE

U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW

LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, WHEN

AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE

ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU

UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.

ColorStream is registered trademark of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.

J51T0101A SH 08/08 N Printed in Thailand

Dear Customer,

Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba LCD TV or TV/DVD

Combination television.

This manual will help you use the many exciting features of your new LCD TV. Before operating your LCD TV or TV/DVD

Combination, please read this manual completely, and keep it nearby for future reference.

Safety Precautions

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS

APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

WARNING

R I S K O F E LECTR I C S HOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER

SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

CAUTION:

To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not use the polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle, or other outlet unless the blades can be inserted completely to prevent blade exposure.

ENERGY STAR ® qualified TV. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent green house gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency guidelines set by the U.S. Environmental

Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of

Energy. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.

NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS

This is a reminder to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. For additional antenna grounding information, see item 26 on page 5.

WARNING

: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with this product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling

CHILD SAFETY:

It Makes A Difference How and Where You Use Your Flat

Panel Display

Congratulations on your purchase! As you enjoy your new product, please keep these safety tips in mind:

The Issue

• The home theater entertainment experience is a growing trend and larger flat panel displays are popular purchases. However, flat panel displays are not always supported on the proper stands or installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

• Flat panel displays that are inappropriately situated on dressers, bookcases, shelves, desks, speakers, chests or carts may fall over and cause injury.

TOSHIBA Cares!

• The consumer electronics industry is committed to making home entertainment enjoyable and safe.

Tune Into Safety

• One size does NOT fit all. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations for the safe installation and use of your flat panel display.

• Carefully read and understand all enclosed instructions for proper use of this product.

• Don’t allow children to climb on or play with furniture and television sets.

• Don’t place flat panel displays on furniture that can easily be used as steps, such as a chest of drawers.

• Remember that children can become excited while watching a program, especially on a “larger than life” flat panel display. Care should be taken to place or install the display where it cannot be pushed, pulled over, or knocked down.

• Care should be taken to route all cords and cables connected to the flat panel display so that they cannot be pulled or grabbed by curious children.

Wall Mounting: If you decide to wall mount your flat panel display, always:

• Use a mount that has been recommended by the display manufacturer and/or listed by an independent laboratory (such as UL, CSA, ETL).

• Follow all instructions supplied by the display and wall mount manufacturers.

• If you have any doubts about your ability to safely install your flat panel display, contact your retailer about professional installation.

• Make sure that the wall where you are mounting the display is appropriate. Some wall mounts are not designed to be mounted to walls with steel studs or old cinder block construction. If you are unsure, contact a professional installer.

• A minimum of two people are required for installation. Flat panel displays can be heavy.

15-inch

Diagonal LCD TV/DVD

COMBINATION

15LV505

OWNER’S MANUAL

Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly.

*Screen size is approximate.

Owner · s Record

The model number and serial number are on the back of your TV/DVD.

Record these numbers in the spaces below. Refer to these numbers whenever you communicate with your

Toshiba dealer about this TV/DVD.

Model number:

Serial number:

FCC compliance information

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT USE THIS POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE

OR OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES CAN BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT BLADE EXPOSURE.

FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance Statement (Part 15):

The Toshiba 15LV505 LCD TV/DVD Combination complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

The party responsible for compliance to these rules is:

Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.

82 Totowa Rd. Wayne, NJ 07470.

Ph: (800) 631-3811 or visit TACP · s website at www.tacp.Toshiba.com

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by removing and applying power to the equipment, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

CAUTION:

Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Toshiba could void the user · s authority to operate this equipment.

CAUTION:

THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.

TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ

THIS OWNER'S MANUAL CAREFULLY AND RETAIN FOR

FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE

MAINTENANCE, CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE

LOCATION.

USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE

OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN

MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.

TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, NEVER

OPEN THE ENCLOSURE. VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE

PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. NEVER STARE

INTO BEAM.

Location of the required Marking

The rating sheet and the safety caution are the rear of the unit.

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION

PERFORMANCE STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

ON DISPOSAL

The lamp(s) inside this product contain mercury. Disposal may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, contact your local authorities or the

Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).

Introduction 4

Connections

Basic setup 20

TV operation 25

Basic playback 42

Advanced playback 45

Function setup 57

Others 62

Introduction

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Important Safety Instructions

Read these instructions.

Keep these instructions.

Heed all warnings.

Follow all instructions.

Do not use this apparatus near water.

Clean only with dry cloth.

Do not block any ventilation openings.

Install in accordance with the manufacturer · s instructions.

Do not install near any heat sources

such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus

(including ampliﬁ ers) that produce heat.

Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug.

A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.

The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not ﬁ t into your outlet, consult an electrician for

Wide plug replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10)

Protect the power cord

from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11)

Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁ ed by the

manufacturer.

12)

Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table speciﬁ ed by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.

When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/ apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13)

Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

Installation, Care, and Service

Installation

Follow these recommendations and precautions and heed all warnings when installing your TV:

15) To avoid damage to this product, never place or store the TV in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas; or areas subject to excessive dust or vibration.

16) Never modify this equipment. Changes or modiﬁ cations may void: a) the warranty, and b) the user

· s authority to operate this equipment under the rules of the

Federal Communications Commission.

17)

DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS

PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE!

Never place the TV on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The TV may fall, causing serious personal injury, death, or serious damage to the TV.

18) Never place items such as vases, aquariums, or candles on top of the TV.

19)

WARNING:

Always place the TV on the ﬂ oor or a sturdy, level, stable

Sturdy tie (as short as possible; min. 4 in.) surface that can support the weight

Clip of the unit. To

Hooks secure the TV, use a sturdy strap from the

Screw

TV top hooks on the rear of the TV pedestal to a wall stud, pillar

TV side

Band or other immovable structure. Make sure the strap is tight, secure, and parallel to the ﬂ oor.

20) Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing liquid or place items such as vases, aquariums, any other item ﬁ lled with liquid, or candles on top of the TV.

21) Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV cabinet back, bottom, and sides.

Never place the TV:

14)

Refer all servicing to qualiﬁ ed service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

Additional Safety Precautions

14a)

CAUTION:

If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does not operate normally, take the following precautions:

• ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power

cord to avoid possible electric shock or ﬁ re.

• NEVER allow your body to come in contact with

any broken glass or liquid from the damaged

television. The LCD panel inside the TV contains glass and a toxic liquid. If the liquid comes in contact

with your mouth or eyes, or your skin is cut by broken glass, rinse the affected area thoroughly with

water and consult your doctor.

• ALWAYS contact a service technician to inspect

the TV any time it has been damaged or dropped.

14b)

WARNING:

To prevent the spread of ﬁ re, keep candles or other open ﬂ ames away from this product at all times.

• too close to drapes, curtains,

or walls; or

• in a conﬁ ned space such as

a bookcase, built-in cabinet,

or any other place with poor ventilation.

The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV from overheating and to help maintain reliable operation of the TV.

Leave a space of at least 4 inches around the TV.

22) Always place the back of the television at least four

(4) inches away from any vertical surface (such as a wall) to allow proper ventilation.

23) Never allow anything to rest on or roll over the power cord, and never place the TV where the power cord is subject to wear or abuse.

24) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords.

25) Always operate the TV with a 120V AC, 60Hz power source only.

CAUTION:

To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not use the polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle, or other outlet unless the blades can be inserted completely with three-wire grounding type to prevent blade exposure.

Introduction

Precautions

Choosing a location for your LCD TV

To Display your LCD TV on the included Pedestal Stand:

Observe the following safety precautions:

1) Place the TV on a sturdy, level surface that can support the weight of the TV.

2) Be sure to secure the TV to a wall, pillar, surface, or other immovable structure. To secure the TV in this manner, use the included strap located at the rear of pedestal stand. (see item 19, page 4).

Important notes about your LCD TV

The following symptoms are technical limitations of

LCD Display technology and are not an indication of malfunction; therefore, Toshiba is not responsible for perceived defects resulting from these symptoms.

1) An after image (ghost) may appear on the screen if a ﬁ xed, non-moving image is displayed for a long period of time. The after image is not permanent and will disappear in a short period of time.

2) The LCD panel contained in this TV is manufactured using an extremely high level of precision technology; however, there may be an occasional pixel (dot of light) that does not operate properly (does not light, remains constantly lit, etc.). This is a structural property of

LCD technology, is not a sign of malfunction, and is not covered under your warranty. Such pixels are not visible when the picture is viewed from a normal viewing distance.

Note:

Interactive video games that involve shooting a

“gun” type of joystick at an on-screen target may not work on this TV.

Notes on handling

Q Do not subject the LCD panel to physical shock, such as dropping it. It may cause unit damage and malfunction.

Q When shipping the unit, the original shipping carton and packing materials come in handy. For fully protection, repack the unit as it was originally packed at the factory.

Q Do not use volatile liquids, such as insecticide, near the unit.

Do not leave rubber or plastic products in contact with the unit for prolonged periods of time.

Doing so will leave marks on the ﬁ nish.

Q The top and rear panels of the unit may become warm after a long period of use. This is not a malfunction.

Q When the unit is not in use, always remove the disc and turn off the power.

Notes on locating the unit

Q When you place this unit near a TV, radio, or VCR, the playback picture may become poor and the sound may be distorted. In this case, place the unit away from the TV, radio, or VCR.

Q To avoid damage to this product, never place or store the TV/DVD in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas; or areas subject to excessive dust or vibration.

Notes on moisture condensation

Moisture condensation damages the unit. Please read the following carefully.

Moisture condensation occurs, for example, when you pour a cold drink into a glass on a warm day and drops of water form on the outside of the glass. In the same way, moisture may condense on this unit · s internal optical pick-up lens, one of the most crucial internal parts of the unit.

Exam ple of moisture condensation!

Optical pick-up lens

Moisture condensation may occur in the following situations:

When you move the unit from a cold area to a warm area.

When you use the unit in a room in which the heat was just turned on.

When you use the unit in an area where cold air from an air conditioner directly hits the unit.

When you use the unit in a humid area.

Never use the unit when moisture condensation

Using the unit when moisture condensation exists may damage discs and internal parts. Connect the power cord of the unit to the wall outlet, turn on the unit, remove the disc, and leave it for two or three hours.

After two or three hours, the unit will have warmed up and evaporated any moisture. Leaving the TV connected to the wall outlet will help prevent moisture condensation in the TV or DVD Player.

Wa it!

Wall outlet

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

(Continued)

Installation

(cont. from previous page)

26) Always make sure the antenna system is properly grounded to provide adequate protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges (see

Section 810 of the National Electric Code.)

Ground clamp

Electric service equipment

Power service grounding electrode system

(NEC Art 250 Part H)

Antenna lead-in wire

Antenna discharge unit

(NEC Section 810-20)

Grounding conductors

(NEC Section 810-21)

Ground clamps

27)

DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS

PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH!

• Use extreme care to make sure you are never in a position where your body

(or any item you are in contact with, accidentally touch overhead power lines.

Never locate the antenna near overhead power lines or other electrical circuits.

Never attempt to install any of the following during lightning activity: a) an antenna system; or b) cables, wires, or any home theater component connected

to an antenna or phone system.

Care

For better performance and safer operation of your

TOSHIBA TV, follow these recommendations and precautions:

28) Always unplug the TV before cleaning.

Wipe the display panel surface gently using only a soft cloth (cotton, ﬂ annel, etc.) A hard cloth may damage the surface of the panel. Avoid contact with alcohol, thinner, benzene, acidic or and alkaline solvent cleaners, abrasive cleaners, or chemical cloths, which may damage the surface. Never spray volatile compounds such as insecticide on the cabinet. Such products may damage or discolor the cabinet.

29)

WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!

Never spill liquids or push objects of any kind into the TV cabinet slots.

30) While it is thundering, do not touch the connecting cables or apparatus.

31) For added protection of your TV from lightning and power surges, always unplug the power cord and disconnect the antenna from the TV if you leave the

TV unattended or unused for long periods of time.

Care

(cont. from previous column)

32) During normal use, the TV may make occasional snap ping or popping sounds. This is normal, especially when the unit is being turned on or off.

If these sounds become frequent or continuous, unplug the power cord and contact a Toshiba

Authorized Service Center.

33) Keep your ﬁ ngers well clear of the disc slot as it is closing.

Failure to do so may cause serious personal injury.

34) When you use headphones, keep the volume at a moderate level. Using headphones continuously at a high volume may cause hearing damage.

35) NEVER look directly into the disc slot or ventilation slots at the source of the laser beam. Doing so may cause sight damage.

36) NEVER use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc.

Such discs are easily broken and may cause serious personal injury or product damage. SUCH DAMAGE

IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR WARRANTY.

37)

WARNING: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL

INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE!

• Never strike the screen with a sharp or heavy object.

• Never touch, press, or place anything on the

LCD screen. These actions will damage the LCD

screen If you need to clean the LCD screen,

follow the instructions in item 28 on this page.

Service

38)

WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!

Never attempt to service the TV yourself.

Opening and removing the covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Failure to follow this WARNING may result in death or serious injury.

Refer all servicing to a Toshiba Authorized Service

Center.

39) If you have the TV serviced:

parts speciﬁ ed by the manufacturer.

• Upon completion of service, ask the service

technician to perform routine safety checks to determine that the TV is in safe operating condition.

40) When the TV reaches the end of its useful life, ask a qualiﬁ ed service technician to properly dispose of the TV.

Notes on discs

On handling discs

Do not touch the playback side of the disc.

For example, handle the disc so that it is shown in ﬁ gure below.

Do not attach paper or tape to discs.

Playback side

On cleaning discs

Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc clean.

Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner, benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.

On storing discs

Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight or near heat sources.

Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and dust such as a bathroom or near a humidiﬁ er.

Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing objects on discs outside of their case may cause warping.

Structure of disc contents

Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and the titles are sub-divided into chapters. Video CDs and

Audio CDs are divided into tracks.

DVD video disc

Title 1

Chapter 1 Chapter 2

Title 2

Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3

Video CD/Audio CD

Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5

Notes on copyright

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of copyrighted materials including, without limitation, television programs, videotapes, and DVDs, is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.

About this owner

· s manual

This owner · s manual explains the basic instructions of this unit. Some DVD video discs are produced in a manner that allows speciﬁ c or limited operation during playback. As such, the unit may not respond to all operating command.

This is not a defect in the unit. Refer to instruction notes of discs.

The following symbol may appear on the TV screen during operation.

It means that the operation is not permitted by the TV/DVD or the disc.

For example, sometimes it is unable to stop the playback of copyright message of the disc when the STOP ( Q ) button is pressed. Alternatively, this symbol may also indicate that the feature is not available for the disc.

Notes on region numbers

The region number of this unit is 1. If region numbers, which stand for their playable area, are printed on your

DVD video disc and you do not ﬁ nd

ALL

, disc playback will not be allowed by the player. (In this case, the unit will display a message on-screen.)

Some DVDs that have no region code label may still be subject to area restrictions and therefore not playable.

On Video CDs

This unit supports Video CDs equipped with the PBC

(Version 2.0) function. (PBC is the abbreviation of

Playback Control.) You can enjoy two playback variations depending on types of discs.

• Video CD not equipped with PBC function (Version 1.1)

Sound and movie can be played on this unit in the same way as a DVD.

• Video CD equipped with PBC function (Version 2.0)

In addition to operation of a Video CD not equipped with the PBC function, you can enjoy playback of interactive software with search function by using the menu displayed on the TV screen (Menu Playback). Some of the functions described in this owner · s manual may not work with some discs.

Each title, chapter or track is assigned a number, which is called “title number”, “chapter number” or “track number” respectively.

There may be discs that do not have these numbers.

Introduction

Notes on discs (Continued)

Playable discs

This unit can play the following discs.

DVD video discs

Disc Mark Contents

Audio

Video

(moving pictures)

Disc

Size

12 cm

8 cm

Maximum playback time

Approx. 4 hours

(single sided disc)

Approx. 8 hours

(double sided disc)

Approx. 80 minutes

(single sided disc)

Approx. 160 minutes

(double sided disc)

Approx. 74 minutes

(single sided disc)

Video

CDs

DIGITAL VIDEO

Audio

Video

(moving pictures)

12 cm

8 cm

Approx. 20 minutes

(single sided disc)

Audio

CDs

12 cm

Approx. 74 minutes

(single sided disc)

Audio

8 cm

Approx. 20 minutes

(single sided disc)

The following discs are also available.

DVD-R/RW discs of DVD video format

CD-R/CD-RW discs of CD-DA, Video CD, MP3, WMA or

JPEG format

Kodak Picture CD and FUJICOLOR CD format

Some of these discs may be incompatible.

• You cannot play discs other than those listed above.

• You cannot play discs of DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, CD-

ROM, Photo CD, etc., or non standardized discs even

if they may be labeled as above.

• Some CD-R/RWs cannot be played back depending

on the recording conditions.

• This unit uses the NTSC color system, and cannot

play DVD video discs recorded in any other color

system (PAL, SECAM, etc.).

• This unit can play an 8cm disc. Please do not use a

disc adapter. It may cause trouble.

• Please do not insert any disc of an irregular shape into the unit, as it may interfere with the function of the unit.

You may not be able to remove it.

• Please do not use after market accessories, such as a

ring protector, as this may cause trouble with the

operation of the unit.

Because of problems and errors that can occur during the creation of DVD and CD Software and/or the manufacture of DVD and CD discs, Toshiba cannot assure that the

DVD player contained in this TV will successfully play every disc bearing the DVD and CD logos.

If you happen to experience any difﬁ culty playing a DVD and/or CD disc on the DVD player contained in this TV, please contact Toshiba Customer Service.

is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing

Corporation.

Introduction

Identification of controls

Front

Introduction

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................ 4

Precautions....................................................... 6

Notes on discs .................................................. 7

Contents ........................................................... 9

Identiﬁ cation of controls .................................. 10

Connections

Antenna connections ...................................... 14

Cable TV connections .................................... 15

Connecting to optional equipment .................. 16

Power source.................................................. 19

Basic setup

Auto setup ...................................................... 20

Setting the language....................................... 21

To memorize channels.................................... 22

TV operation

TV operation ................................................... 25

Labeling channels........................................... 27

Labeling video inputs ...................................... 28

Setting the V-Chip........................................... 29

Setting the closed captions............................. 33

CC advanced .................................................. 34

Adjusting the picture preference ..................... 35

Picture settings ............................................... 35

Viewing the wide-screen picture formats ........ 36

Film Mode ....................................................... 37

DNR ................................................................ 37

Sound control adjustment ............................... 38

Selecting Stereo/Second Audio Program (SAP) .... 38

Selecting the audio language ......................... 39

Using the aspect feature................................. 40

Adjusting the back lighting .............................. 40

Setting the Auto Shut Off ................................ 41

Resetting your settings ................................... 41

Basic playback

Playing a disc ................................................. 42

Advanced playback

Zooming.......................................................... 45

Locating desired scene................................... 45

Marking desired scenes.................................. 46

Repeat playback ............................................. 47

A-B Repeat playback ...................................... 47

Program playback........................................... 48

Random playback ........................................... 48

Changing angles..............................................49

Title selection ...................................................49

DVD menu .......................................................49

Changing soundtrack language .......................50

Subtitles ...........................................................50

Disc status .......................................................51

To turn off the PBC ..........................................51

MP3/WMA/JPEG and Audio CD operation ......52

Repeat, random and program playback using ﬁ le browser.............................................55

Function setup

Customizing the function settings ....................57

Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc .....................................................61

Others

Understanding the Power Return feature ........62

Troubleshooting ...............................................62

Reception disturbances ...................................64

Language code list ..........................................65

Speciﬁ cations ..................................................66

Limited United States Warranty .......................67

Rear

AC INPUT cover

Side

Speaker

Disc slot

Remote sensor

POWER indicator

Top

/ Q STOP button

MENU button

21 57

INPUT/ENTER button

POWER button

/ PLAY button

VOLUME (+/–) buttons

EJECT button

AC INPUT

Antenna jack

14 15

COLORSTREAM HD IN jacks

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack

18 19

VIDEO/GAME IN jack

16 17

HEAD PHONE jack

Introduction

Identification of controls (Continued)

Remote control

The instructions in this manual describe the function on the remote control. See the page in for details.

EJECT button

T V/ D V D button

Direct channel selection buttons (0-9)

Numbered buttons (0-9)

DI S PL A Y button

26 51

CH / button

S UBTITLE button

INPUT button

ZOOM button

PL A Y MODE button

47 48 51

PL A Y button

MENU button

S ETUP button

P A U S E button

CH RTN button

S KIP ( ) button

RE V button

FF button

S LO W ( ) button

TOP MENU button

RETURN button

53 57

G A ME button

PO W ER button

S LEEP button

JUMP button

Direct channel selection button ( )

A UDIO S ELECT button

V OL + / – button

MUTE button

*D V D MENU button

ENTER button

Direction buttons ( / / / )

E X IT / C A NCEL button

S TOP button

CLO S ED C A PTION button

S KIP ( )button

S LO W ( ) button

M A RKER button

A NGLE button

REPE A T A -B button

PIC S IZE button

S E-R0305

*DVD MENU button

Use the DVD MENU button to display the menu included on many DVD video discs.

To operate a menu, follow the instructions in “DVD menu.”

Connections

Antenna connections

If you are using an indoor or outdoor antenna, follow the instructions below that correspond to your antenna system.

If you are using a cable TV service (CABLE), see

for Cable TV connections.

Combination VHF/UHF antenna (Single 75 ohm cable or 300 ohm twin-lead wire)

Antenna jack

75 ohm coaxial cable

(not supplied)

300-75 ohm matching transformer (not supplied)

Connect the 75 ohm cable from the combination

VHF/UHF antenna to the antenna jack on the back of the TV/DVD.

If your combination VHF/UHF antenna has a 300 ohm twin-lead wire, use the 300-75 ohm matching transformer (not supplied).

Combination VHF/UHF antenna (Separate VHF and UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wires)

Antenna jack

300-75 ohm matching transformer (not supplied)

Connect the UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire to the combiner (not supplied). Connect the VHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire to the 300-75 ohm matching transformer

(not supplied). Attach the transformer to the combiner, then attach the combiner to the antenna jack on the back of the TV/DVD.

Combiner

(not supplied)

UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire

(not supplied)

VHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire

(not supplied)

Separate VHF/UHF antennas (75 ohm VHF cable and 300 ohm UHF twin-lead wires)

Antenna jack

Connect the VHF 75 ohm cable and UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire to the combiner (not supplied).

Attach the combiner to the antenna jack on the back of the TV/DVD.

VHF 75 ohm

(not supplied)

Combiner

(not supplied)

UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire

(not supplied)

Inserting batteries

Open the battery compartment cover in the direction of the arrow.

Install two “R03/AAA” batteries

(supplied), paying attention to the polarity indicated in the battery compartment.

Replace the compartment cover.

Operation

• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor and press control buttons to operate.

• Operate the remote control within 30° angle on either side of the remote sensor, up to a distance of approx. 5 meters.

Approx. 5 meters

Caution:

• Never throw batteries into a ﬁ re.

Note:

• Be sure to use AAA size batteries.

• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.

• Batteries should always be disposed of with the environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in accordance with applicable laws and regulations.

• If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if the operating range becomes reduced, replace batteries with new ones.

• When necessary to replace batteries in the remote control, always replace both batteries with new ones.

Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries in combination.

• Always remove batteries from remote control if they are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for an extended period of time. This will prevent battery acid from leaking into the battery compartment.

Cable TV connections

This TV/DVD has an extended tuning range and can tune most cable channels without using a Cable TV converter box.

Some cable companies offer “premium pay channels” in which the signal is scrambled. Descrambling these signals for normal viewing requires the use of a descrambler device which is generally provided by the cable company.

For subscribers to basic cable TV service

Antenna jack

For basic cable service not requiring a converter/descrambler box, connect the Cable TV 75 ohm coaxial cable directly to the

Antenna jack on the back of the TV/DVD.

75 ohm coaxial cable

For subscribers to scrambled cable TV service

If you subscribe to a cable TV service which requires the use of a converter/descrambler box, connect the incoming 75 ohm coaxial cable to the converter/descrambler box. Using another 75 ohm coaxial cable, connect the output jack of the converter/descrambler box to the antenna jack on the TV/DVD. Follow the connections shown below. Set the TV/DVD to the output channel of the converter/descrambler box (usually channel 3 or 4) and use the converter/descrambler box to select channels.

Incoming 75 ohm

Cable TV

Converter/ descrambler

75 ohm cable to

TV/DVD

Antenna jack

For subscribers to unscrambled basic cable TV service with scrambled premium channels

If you subscribe to a cable TV service in which basic channels are unscrambled and premium channels require the use of a converter/descrambler box, you may wish to use a signal splitter and an A/B Switch box (available from the cable company or an electronics supply store). Follow the connections shown below. With the switch in the “B” position, you can directly tune any nonscrambled channels on your TV/DVD. With the switch in the “A” position, tune your TV/DVD to the output of the converter/descrambler box (usually channel 3 or 4) and use the converter/descrambler box to tune scrambled channels.

Incoming

75 ohm

Cable TV

Splitter

Converter/ descrambler

A/B switch

75 ohm cable to TV/DVD

Antenna jack

Connections

Connecting to optional equipment

You can enjoy VCR, camcorder or TV game with connection to external input.

0-3

INPUT

GAME

Using the audio/video inputs

Press

INPUT

to view a signal from another device connected to your TV/DVD, such as a VCR player. You can select TV, Video or ColorStream HD depending on which input jacks you used to connect your devices.

Press

INPUT

on the remote control to display the current signal source.

To change the input source, press

INPUT

again or press

0-2

. (

is for selection DVD mode.)

Connecting to a VCR

To playback from the VCR, connect the VCR to the TV/DVD as shown.

Select the “Video” by pressing

INPUT

repeatedly.

: Signal ﬂ ow

VCR

(yellow)

(white)

(red)

Back side

To Audio/Video OUT

Audio/Video cable (not supplied)

Source Selection

0.TV

1.Video

2.ColorStream HD

3.DVD

[0-3]:Select

To VIDEO/GAME IN

Connecting to a camcorder

To playback from the camcorder, connect the camcorder to the TV/DVD as shown.

Select the “Video” by pressing

INPUT

repeatedly.

: Signal ﬂ ow

Back side

Camcorder

(yellow)

(white)

(red)

To Audio/Video OUT

Audio/Video cable (not supplied)

To VIDEO/GAME IN

Connecting to a TV Game

You can enjoy playing a TV game on the screen by adjusting to the suitable brightness for your eyes.

1. Connect a TV Game to the TV/DVD.

2. Select the Game mode by pressing

GAME

. The Game mode screen appears.

• If

GAME

is pressed during standby mode, the unit turns on automatically and the Game mode screen

appears on the screen.

: Signal ﬂ ow (yellow)

Back side

(white)

(red)

To Audio/Video OUT To VIDEO/GAME IN

Audio/Video cable (not supplied)

Note:

• You can also change the TV/DVD screen to the desired mode by pressing the

/ .

• The TV/DVD can also be used as a display device for many video games. However, due to the wide variety of different types of signal generated by these devices and subsequent hook-up variations required, they have not all been included in the suggested connection diagrams. You · ll need to consult each component · s Owner · s Manual for additional information.

• Interactive video games that involve shooting a “gun” type of joystick at on-screen target may not work on this

TV/DVD.

Connections

Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)

You can enjoy high quality dynamic sounds by connecting the

TV/DVD to optional audio equipment.

* This section uses the following reference mark.

: Front speaker

: Rear speaker

: Sub woofer

: Center speaker

: Signal ﬂ ow

Connecting to an ampliﬁ er equipped with a Dolby ® Digital decoder

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is the surround sound technology used in theaters showing the latest movies, and is now available to reproduce this realistic effect in the home. You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the Dolby Digital recording system with this dynamic realistic sound by connecting the TV/DVD to a 6 channel ampliﬁ er equipped with a Dolby

Digital decoder or Dolby Digital processor. If you have a Dolby Surround Pro Logic decoder, you will obtain the full beneﬁ t of

Pro Logic from the same DVD movies that provide full 5.1-channel Dolby Digital soundtracks, as well as from titles with the

Dolby Surround mark.

Back side

Ampliﬁ er equipped with a

Dolby Digital decoder

To COAXIAL DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

Ω

coaxial cable (not supplied)

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

Connecting to an ampliﬁ er equipped with a DTS

decoder

Digital Theater Systems (DTS)

DTS is a high quality surround technology used in theaters and now available for home use, on DVD video discs or audio CDs.

If you have a DTS decoder or processor, you can obtain the full beneﬁ t of 5.1 channel DTS encoded sound tracks on DVD video discs or audio CDs.

Back side

To COAXIAL DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

Ampliﬁ er equipped with a DTS decoder

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

Ω

coaxial cable (not supplied)

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Out are registered trademarks and the

DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.

Reserved.

Connecting to an ampliﬁ er equipped with an MPEG audio decoder

MPEG2 sound

You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the MPEG2 recording system with dynamic realistic sound by connecting an ampliﬁ er equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder or MPEG2 audio processor.

Back side

Ampliﬁ er equipped with an

MPEG2 audio decoder

To COAXIAL DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

Ω

coaxial cable (not supplied)

Connecting to an optional equipment with S-video output

If you connect a VCR with an S-Video cable to the S-VIDEO IN jack on the left side of the TV/DVD, you must also connect the audio cables to the AUDIO IN jacks as shown below. The S-Video cable only carries the video signal. The audio signal is separated.

Select the “Video” by pressing

INPUT

repeatedly.

To S-VIDEO IN

(white)

Back side

: Signal ﬂ ow

Ex. VCR with S-Video

(playback)

(red)

To VIDEO/GAME IN

To Audio (L/R) OUT To S-VIDEO OUT

S-Video cable (not supplied)

Audio cable (not supplied)

To AUDIO (L/R) IN

Note:

• When the S-Video cable and the standard video cable are connected at the same time, the S-video cable takes precedence.

Connecting an optional equipment with ColorStream ® (Component video) output

Your TV/DVD is capable of using ColorStream ® (component video). Connecting your TV/DVD to a component video compatible DVD player, such as a Toshiba DVD player with ColorStream ® can greatly enhance picture quality and performance.

Select the “ColorStream HD” by pressing

INPUT

repeatedly.

Back side

: Signal ﬂ ow

Ex. DVD player with Component video

To COLORSTREAM HD

(Y, P

) IN

To Audio (L/R) OUT

To Component Video OUT

Component video cable

(not supplied)

Audio cable (not supplied)

(white) (red)

To COLORSTREAM HD

AUDIO (L/R) IN

When using the Component video cable, an Audio cable must be connected to

COLORSTREAM HD AUDIO(L/R) IN jacks.

Note:

• The ColorStream ® (component video) inputs on this unit are for use with devices that output 480i, 1080i interlaced signals and 480p, 720p progressive signals.

• Refer to the owner · s manual of the connected equipment as well.

• When you connect the unit to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet before making any connections.

• If you place the unit near a tuner or radio, the radio broadcast sound might be distorted. In this case, place the unit away from the tuner and radio.

Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)/

Power source

Connecting to an ampliﬁ er equipped with a digital audio input

2 channel digital stereo

You can enjoy the dynamic sound of 2 channel digital stereo by connecting an ampliﬁ er equipped with a digital audio input and speaker system (right and left front speakers).

Note:

PCM audio is limited to DVD or CD playback.

Back side

Ampliﬁ er equipped with a

Digital audio input

To COAXIAL DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

Ω

coaxial cable (not supplied)

Note:

• DO NOT connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the TV/DVD to the AC-3 RF input of a Dolby Digital Receiver.

This input on your A/V Receiver is reserved for Laserdisc use only and is incompatible with the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack

• Connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the TV/DVD to the “COAXIAL” input of a Receiver or Processor.

• Refer to the owner · s manual of the connected equipment as well.

• When you connect the TV/DVD to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet

before making any connections.

• The output sound of the TV/DVD has a wide dynamic range. Be sure to adjust the receiver · s volume to a moderate listening level.

Otherwise, the speakers and your hearing may be damaged by a sudden high volume sound.

• Turn off the ampliﬁ er before you connect or disconnect the TV/DVD · s power cord. If you leave the ampliﬁ er · s power on, the speakers

may be damaged.

Power source

To use AC powe r sou r ce

Open the AC INPUT cover.

Connect the AC cord plug into this TV/DVD’s AC INPUT jack, then close the AC INPUT cover.

Connect the AC cord into an AC outlet.

Wider Hole and Blade

AC Outlet

AC 120V, 60Hz

AC cord (supplied)

Note:

• Never connect the AC line cord plug to other than the specified voltage (120V 60Hz). Use the attached power cord only.

•

If the polarized AC cord does not fit into a non-polarized AC outlet, do not attempt to file or cut the blade. It is the user’s responsibility to have an electrician replace the obsolete outlet.

If you cause a static discharge when touching the unit and the unit fails to function, simply unplug the unit from the AC outlet

• and plug it back in. The unit should return to normal operation.

If the AC cord plug is plugged in for the first time, wait for approx. 5 seconds before pressing

POWER

Basic setup

Auto Setup

The Auto Setup function helps to install your TV/DVD easily.

It leads you the Language selection, Air/Cable selection and Automatic channel search.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that the antenna or cable TV system connection is made!

POWER

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

Auto Setup

1 To tu r n on the TV/DVD, p r ess POWER.

• POWER indicator on the front of the unit changes blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds for a picture to appear on screen.

2 Auto Setup menu appea r s on the sc r een.

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Language”, then p r ess ϵ o r ϶ to select you r desi r ed language.

Auto Setup

L a ngu a ge

Sign a l T y pe

Au t om at ic Se a rch

English

C a ble

S ta r t

: Select : Adjust

3 P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Signal Type”, then p r ess ϵ

o r

to select “Ai r ” o r “Cable”.

Auto Setup

L a ngu a ge

Sign a l T y pe

Au t om at ic Se a rch

English

C a ble

S ta r t

5 Now the “Automatic Search” starts.

Auto Setup

L a ngu a ge

Sign a l T y pe

Au t om at ic Se a rch

English

C a ble

S ta r t

An a log Ch a nnel Found : 0

Dig ta l Ch a nnel Found : 0

EXIT : End

•

If you press

EXIT/CANCEL

, the Automatic

Search stops and changes to the TV screen.

After the starting setup is completed, the TV channel appears on the screen.

Note:

• The Auto Setup function will work only when you

• press

POWER

for the first time.

The process of “Automatic Search” may take 15 to

30 minutes to complete, depending on your regional cable service.

: Select

Air - VHF/UHF channels

Cable - Cable TV channels

: Adjust

Press ϳ

o r

ϴ to select “Automatic Search”, then press

o r ENTER.

Auto Setup

L a ngu a ge

Sign a l T y pe

Au t om at ic Se a rch

English

C a ble

S ta r t

: Select ENTER:Set

Basic setup

To memorize channels

This TV/DVD is equipped with a channel memory feature which allows channels to skip up or down to the next channel set into memory, skipping over unwanted channels. Before selecting channels, they must be programmed into the TV/DVD

· s memory. To use this TV/DVD with an antenna, set the Signal Type option to the Air mode. When shipped from the factory, this menu option is in the Cable mode.

Air/Cable selection

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

Automatic search

1 P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Channel”, then p r ess

o r ENTER.

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Channel”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Auto Ch Memo r y”, then p r ess

o r ENTER.

Channel

Add/Dele t e

Au t o Ch Memor y

Ch L a bel

2 P r ess ϳ

o r

to select “Auto Ch Memo r y”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Channel

Add/Dele t e

Au t o Ch Memor y

Ch L a bel

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Signal Type”.

Auto Ch Memor y

Signal Type

Automatic Search

Cable

Start

P r ess ϵ

o r

to select “Ai r ” o r “Cable”.

Auto Ch Memor y

Signal Type

Automatic Search

Air

Start

: Select ENTER:Set

3 P r ess ϳ

o r

to select “Automatic Sea r ch”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Auto Ch Memor y

Signal Type

Automatic Search

Cable

Stop

Analog Channel Found : 0

Digital Channel Found : 0

: Select ENTER:Cancel

4 The TV/DVD will begin memo r izing all the channels available in you r a r ea.

Air - VHF/UHF channels

Cable - Cable TV channels

P r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

Setting the language

This TV/DVD can display the on screen language in English, French or

Spanish.

Select the language you prefer ﬁ rst, then proceed with the other menu options.

POWER

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

Setting the language

1 To tu r n on the TV/DVD, p r ess POWER.

• POWER indicator on the front of the unit changes blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds for a picture to appear on screen.

4 P r ess ϵ o r ϶ to select the desi r ed language:

English, F r ench (F r ançais) o r Spanish

(Español).

2 P r ess MENU. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Setup”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

3 P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Language”.

Setup

Closed C a p t ion

L a ngu a ge

Video L a bel

B a ckligh t

Au t o Shu t Off

Aspec t

Rese t

: Select

English

: Adjust

Off

5 P r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

Note:

• If the unit does not ope r ate p r ope r ly, o r No key ope r ation (by the unit and/o r the r emote cont r ol):

Static electricity, etc., may affect the TV/DVD’s

•

• operation. In such case, disconnect the AC cord once, then connect it again.

If no buttons are pressed for more than about 60 seconds, the MENU screen will return to normal operation automatically.

The TV section has its own menu and the DVD section also has its own menu

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

Add/Delete channel

You can select the channel that you want to skip.

1 P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Channel”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

2 P r ess ϳ

o r

to select “Add/Delete”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Channel

Add/Dele t e

Au t o Ch Memor y

Ch L a bel

: Select ENTER:Set

3 P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Add/Delete

Adding Ch a nnel

Add/Dele t e

Cle a r All

4 P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select the channel that you want to skip.

Add/Delete

3-001

3-002

Sign a l

An a log

Digi ta l

An a log

Add

Dele t e

Add

Dele t e

: Select : Adjust

5 P r ess ϵ

o r

to select “Add” o r “Delete”, whicheve r function you want to pe r fo r m.

Add/Delete

3-001

3-002

Sign a l

An a log

Digi ta l

An a log

Dele t e

Add

Dele t e

Add

Dele t e

: Select : Adjust

Repeat steps 4 - 5 fo r othe r channels you want to add o r delete.

P r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

: Select ENTER:Set

Basic setup

To memorize channels (Continued)

Adding Channel

If you find a new channel unregistered, you can add the new channel into the channel memory.

Tune in the new channel.

P r ess MENU. The TV menu sc r een will appea r .

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Channel”, then p r ess

϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

ENTER

/ /

EXIT/CANCEL

Clear All

All channels are deleted from the channel memory.

1 P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Channel”, then p r ess

o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

3 P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Channel

Add/Dele t e

Au t o Ch Memor y

Ch L a bel

2 P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then p r ess

o r ENTER.

Channel

Add/Dele t e

Au t o Ch Memor y

Ch L a bel

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Adding Channel”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER. The new channel will be added into the channel memo r y.

Add/Delete

Adding Ch a nnel

Add/Dele t e

Cle a r All

: Select ENTER:Set

3 P r ess ϳ

o r

to select “Clea r All”, then p r ess

϶ o r ENTER.

Add/Delete

Adding Ch a nnel

Add/Dele t e

Cle a r All

: Select ENTER:Set

4 P r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

: Select ENTER:Set

5 P r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

TV operation

TV operation (Continued)

SLEEP

DISPLAY

VOL +/–

MUTE

CH RTN

TV operation (continued)

Ϯ DISPLAY

Press

DISPLAY

to display the current information on the screen.

62-001 HDTV Moving Pictu

CH-1 r e1

Digital Ai r

No P r og r r mation is available

Sleep Time r

Off

English

•

When the TV/DVD receives a digital signal, the digital information will appear.

Natu r al

1080i

Channel number • Station name

Channel label (if preset) • Broadcast program name

V-Chip rating

Sleep timer

• Signal type

• Audio language

Program guide

Resolution

• Picture size

Analog Cable

Sleep Time r

Off

•

When the TV/DVD receives a analog signal, the analog information will appear.

Channel number

V-Chip rating

Sleep timer

Picture size

Natu r al

480i

• Channel label (if preset)

• Signal type

• Audio information (Stereo or SAP)

• Resolution

Press

DISPLAY

again to clear the call display.

Note:

• After a few seconds, DISPLAY screen will return to normal TV-operation automatically.

Ϯ CH RTN

This button allows you to go back to the last channel selected by pressing

CH RTN

. Press

CH RTN

again to return to the last channel you were watching.

Ϯ SLEEP

To set the TV/DVD to turn off after a preset amount of time, press

SLEEP

on the remote

S l e e p T i m e r

0 h 1 0 m

control. The clock will count up 10 minutes for each press of the

SLEEP

button (Off, 0h 10m, 0h 20m,

..., 2h 0m). After the sleep time is programmed, the display will appear briefly every ten minutes to remind you that the sleep timer is operating. To confirm the sleep timer setting, press

SLEEP

and the remaining time will be displayed for a few seconds. To cancel the sleep timer, press

SLEEP

repeatedly until the display turns to Off.

Ϯ HEAD PHONES

Insert a stereo headphones (not supplied) with a 1/8” mini plug into the HEAD PHONE jack on the rear panel.

If you connect headphones, the sound from TV/DVD speakers is muted.

Ϯ MUTE

Press

MUTE

to switch off the sound. The TV/DVD’s sound will be silenced and “Mute” will appear on the screen. The sound can be switched back on by pressing this button again or the

VOL +

–

TV operation

TV operation

POWER

0–9, –

VOL +/–

CH /

TV operation

To turn on the TV/DVD, press

POWER

(POWER indicator on the front of the unit changes blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds for a picture to appear on screen.)

Adjust the volume level by pressing

VOL +

–

The volume level will be indicated on the screen by orange bars. As the volume level increases, so do the number of bars. If the volume decreases, the number of orange bars also decreases.

Set the Signal Type option to the appropriate position (see “Air/Cable selection”

Air - VHF/UHF channels

Cable - Cable TV channels

Press the

Di r ect Channel Selection (0-9, –) buttons

/ to select the channel.

(If you press only channel number, channel selection will be delayed for a few seconds.)

TO SELECT ANALOG CHANNELS

1-9: Press 1-9 as needed. Example, to

10-99: select channel 2, press

Press the 2 digits in order. Example, to select channel 12, press

100-125: Press the 3 digits in order. Example, to select channel 120, press

TO SELECT DIGITAL CHANNELS

Press the first 3 digits, then press the

–

button, followed by the remaining number.

Example, to select channel 015-001, press

5, –, 0, 0, 1.

• If a channel is selected with only audio content,

•

“Audio only” will be displayed on the screen.

If a channel is selected with a weak digital signal, “Digital channel signal strength is low” will be displayed on the screen.

The same program may be available on either

• an analog channel or a digital channel. You may choose to watch either format.

If a channel is selected to which you have not subscribed, “Digital channel is encrypted” will be displayed on the screen.

VHF/UHF/CABLE CHANNELS

Ai r Cable

VHF

2-13

UHF

14-69

VHF

2-13

STD/HRC/IRC

01 (5A)

Note:

• If a channel with no broadcast is selected, the sound

• will automatically be muted.

It may take a few seconds for a digital channel picture to appear on screen after being selected.

Labeling channels

Channel label appear with the channel number display each time you turn on the

TV/DVD, select a channel, or press DISPLAY.

You can choose any four characters to identify a channel.

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

Labeling channels

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Channel” menu, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϵ o r ϶ r epeatedly until the cha r acte r you want appea r s in the fi r st space.

Ch Label

Ch a nnel Number

Ch L a bel

L a bel Cle a r

15-1

P r ess ϳ

o r

to select “Ch Label”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

The “Ch Label” menu will appea r .

Channel

Add/Dele t e

Au t o Ch Memor y

Ch L a bel

: Select : Adjust

: Select

The characters rotation as follows:

SPACE

- , () @ / + = -

: Adjust ENTER:Set

If the character which you desire appears, press

ENTER

Repeat this step to enter the rest of the characters.

If you would like a blank space in the label name, you must choose the empty space from the list of characters.

When you finish inputting the label name, p r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϵ o r ϶ to select a channel you want to label, then p r ess ϴ .

Ch Label

Ch a nnel Number

Ch L a bel

L a bel Cle a r

15-1

Repeat steps 3 -5 fo r othe r channel. You can assign a label to each channel.

To clea r a Ch Label

After step 3 above, press ϳ

to select “Label Clear”, then press ϶ or

ENTER

Note:

• The channel labels will be reset after “Automatic

Search”

TV ope r ation

Labeling video inputs

The Video Label feature allows you to label each input source for your TV/DVD.

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

Labeling video inputs

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Setup”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ

o r

to select “Video Label”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Setup

Closed C a p t ion

L a ngu a ge

Video L a bel

B a ckligh t

Au t o Shu t Off

Aspec t

Rese t

: Select

English

Off

ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select an input which you want to label.

Video Label

Video

ColorS t re a m HD

P r ess ϵ o r ϶ to select the desi r ed label fo r that input sou r ce.

Video Label

Video

ColorS t re a m HD

SAT

: Select : Adjust

–

VCR

DVD

DTV

SAT

CBL

: Uses the default label name

: Video cassette recorder

: DVD video

: Digital TV set-top box

: Satellite box

: Cable box

5 P r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

: Select : Adjust

TV ope r ation

Setting the V-Chip (Continued)

0–9

ENTER

/ / /

To set the V-Chip

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Lock”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “V-Chip Set”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

The V-Chip Set Menu appea r s.

Lock

V-Chip

V-Chip Se t

V-Chip Se t (DTV)

Upd at e

Ch a nge P a ssword

Use Numbe r buttons (0-9) to ente r you r passwo r d, then p r ess ENTER. Then Lock menu will appea r .

Lock

P a ssword

----

: Select ENTER: Set

P r ess ϳ

o r

to select which r ating will be used, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER. Each r ating below will appea r .

V-Chip Set

TV R at ing

Movie R at ing

[09 ] : Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ

o r

to select “V-Chip”, then p r ess ϵ o r ϶ to select “On” .

Lock

V-Chip

V-Chip Se t

V-Chip Se t (DTV)

Upd at e

Ch a nge P a ssword

: Select : Adjust

: Select ENTER: Set

TV Rating

ALL D

TV-Y

TV-Y7

TV-G

TV-PG

TV-14

TV-MA

: Select

L S V FV

ENTER:Set

You can set the rating using age level and genre.

Age:

TV-Y

TV-Y7

All children

7 years old and above

TV-G :

General audience

TV-PG :

Parental guidance

TV-14 :

14 years old and above

TV-MA :

17 years old and above

Gen r e:

ALL

All

Dialogue

Language

Sex

Violence

Fantasy Violence

Setting the V-Chip

An age limitation can be set to restrict children from viewing or hearing violent scenes or pictures that you may choose to exclude. The restriction applies to “TV Rating” and “Movie Rating” if this data is transmitted. You may set this restriction separately. To use the V-Chip function, you must register a password.

Notes:

If you forget the password, press

DISPLAY

four times within ﬁ ve seconds while the TV is in password entering mode. This allows you to reset your password.

To r egiste r a passwo r d

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Lock”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

To change a passwo r d

0–9

DISPLAY

ENTER

/ /

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Lock”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

Select and ente r you r passwo r d (4 digits) using Numbe r buttons (0-9), then p r ess

ENTER.

Lock

New P a ssword

----

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Change Passwo r d”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

The Change Passwo r d sc r een will appea r .

Lock

V-Chip

V-Chip Se t

V-Chip Se t (DTV)

Upd at e

Ch a nge P a ssword

Off

[09 ] : Select ENTER:Set

Ente r the same passwo r d again to confi r m, then p r ess ENTER.

The passwo r d is now r egiste r ed.

Lock

Confirm P a ssword

----

: Select ENTER: Set

Ente r a new passwo r d using Numbe r buttons

(0-9), then p r ess ENTER.

Change Pass w ord

New P a ssword

Confirm P a ssword

----

[09 ] : Select ENTER:Set

Note:

• The V-Chip feature is available only for the U.S. V-Chip system. The Canadian V-Chip system is not supported.

[09 ] : Select ENTER:Set

Ente r the same passwo r d again to confi r m, then p r ess ENTER.

The new passwo r d is now r egiste r ed.

MUTE

ENTER

EXIT/CANCEL

Movie Rating

PG-13

NC-17

: Select ENTER:Set

: All ages

: Parental guidance

PG-1 3

: Parental guidance less than 13 years old

: Under 17 years old parental guidance suggested

NC-17

: 17 years old and above

: Adult only

P r ess ϳ

o r

to select the desi r ed r ating, then p r ess ENTER.

P r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

To use the TV/DVD afte r it is p r otected.

When a program is received that is blocked by the V-

Chip, press

MUTE

, then enter your password.

The protection will be temporarily overridden. If the TV/

DVD is turned off or the channel is changed, the V-Chip restriction will be reactivated.

Note:

• The V-Chip function is activated only on programs and input sources that include a rating signal.

TV ope r ation

Setting the V-Chip (Continued)

As a supplement to the standard V-Chip rating system, your television will be able to download an additional rating system, if such a system becomes available in the future.

0–9

ENTER

/ /

To download the additional V-Chip r ating system (when available)

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Lock”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

Use Numbe r buttons (0-9) to ente r you r passwo r d, then p r ess ENTER. Then Lock menu will appea r .

Lock

P a ssword

----

You also need “Update” p r ocedu r e to update r ating info r mation.

Note:

• You can only download the additional V-Chip rating

• system when your TV/DVD is receiving a digital signal.

When you download the additional rating system, it

•

• may take some time for the download to occur.

The V-Chip rating information and system are not determined or controlled by the TV/DVD.

The standard V-Chip rating system is available whether your TV/DVD is receiving a digital signal or

•

• not, and will block both analog and digital programs.

To set the restriction level using the standard V-Chip rating system, select “V-Chip Set” in step 3.

The downloadable V-Chip rating system is an evolving technology, and availability, content, and format may vary.

You cannot select this feature if the TV/DVD is not receiving a digital signal for the current station.

[09 ] : Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “V-Chip Set (DTV)”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Lock

V-Chip

V-Chip Se t

V-Chip Se t (DTV)

Upd at e

Ch a nge P a ssword

: Select ENTER:Set

If the TV/DVD is not sto r ing the additional r ating system, the TV/DVD will begin downloading it, which may take some time to be completed.

Set you r p r efe rr ed content r ating limits fo r the additional r ating system.

TV ope r ation

CC advanced

When you have selected Custom as the display method, you can adjust the various setting listed below as follows:

This feature is designed to customize Digital Captions only.

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

CC advanced

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Setup”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Closed Caption”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

The Closed Caption menu will appea r .

Setup

Closed C a p t ion

L a ngu a ge

Video L a bel

B a ckligh t

Au t o Shu t Off

Aspec t

Rese t

: Select

English

Off

ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Digital CC P r eset”, then p r ess ϵ o r ϶ to select “Custom”.

Closed Caption

CC Se tt ing

CC Priori ty

An a log C a p t ion

Digi ta l C a p t ion

Digi ta l CC Prese t

CC Adv a nced

Digi ta l CC

CS1

Cus t om

: Select : Adjust

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “CC Advanced”, then p r ess

o r ENTER.

The CC Advanced menu will appea r .

Closed Caption

CC Se tt ing

CC Priori ty

An a log C a p t ion

Digi ta l C a p t ion

Digi ta l CC Prese t

CC Adv a nced

Digi ta l CC

CS1

Cus t om

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ

o r

to select the desi r ed item, then p r ess ϵ o r ϶ to change the setting.

CC Advanced

Tex t Size

Tex t T y pe

Tex t Edge

Tex t Color

Tex t Op a ci ty

B a ckground Color

B a ckground Op a ci ty

: Select : Adjust

Au t o

You can select from among the following items and parameters.

Text Size:

Auto, Small, Standard, Large

Text Type:

Auto, Style1, Style2, Style3,

Style4, Style5, Style6, Style7

Text Edge:

Text Colo r :

Auto, None, Raised, Depressed,

Uniform, Left Shadow, Right

Shadow

Auto, Black, White, Red, Green,

Blue, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

Text Opacity:

Auto, Solid, Transparent,

Translucent, Flashing

Backg r ound

Colo r :

Auto, Black, White, Red, Green,

Blue, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

Backg r ound

Opacity:

Auto, Solid, Transparent,

Translucent, Flashing

P r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

Note:

•

You cannnot select “CC Advanced” in the menu before set “Digital CC preset” to “Custom”.

You cannot set the Closed Caption “Text Color” and

“Background Color” as the same color.

Setting the closed captions

WHAT IS CLOSED CAPTIONING?

This television has the capability to decode and display closed captioned television programs. Closed captioning will display text on the screen for hearing impaired viewers or it will translate and display text in another language.

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

CLOSED CAPTION

Setting the closed captions

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Setup”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Closed Caption”, then p r ess

o r ENTER.

The Closed Caption menu will appea r .

Setup

Closed C a p t ion

L a ngu a ge

Video L a bel

B a ckligh t

Au t o Shu t Off

Aspec t

Rese t

: Select

English

Off

ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “CC Setting”, then p r ess ϵ o r ϶ to select “On”.

On:

Captions will be displayed on the screen.

Off:

Captions will not be displayed on the screen.

Closed Caption

CC Se tt ing

CC Priori ty

An a log C a p t ion

Digi ta l C a p t ion

Digi ta l CC Prese t

CC Adv a nced

Off

Digi ta l CC

CS1

Def a ul t

: Select : Adjust

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Analog Caption” o r

“Digital Caption”, then p r ess ϵ o r ϶ to select the desi r ed Closed Caption mode.

When you select “Analog Caption”, you can choose C1, C2, C3, C4, T1, T2, T3 and T4.

When you select “Digital Caption”, you can choose from CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4, CS5 and CS6.

Closed Caption

CC Se tt ing

CC Priori ty

An a log C a p t ion

Digi ta l C a p t ion

Digi ta l CC Prese t

CC Adv a nced

Digi ta l CC

CS1

Def a ul t

: Select : Adjust

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “CC P r io r ity”, then p r ess ϵ o r ϶ to select “Digital CC” o r “Analog

CC”.

Note:

• Depending on the broadcast signal, some

Analog Captions will function with a Digital broadcast signal. This step prevent that two kind of captions are overlapping.

P r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

Note:

• You can also display the Closed Caption menu screen by pressing

CLOSED CAPTION

on the remote control.

• Digital caption feature is not available for analog channel.

Important Note:

If text is not available in your viewing area, a black rectangle may appear on-screen. If this happens, set

“CC Setting” to “Off”.

Adjusting the picture preference/

Picture settings

You can select four picture modes—Sports, Standard, Movie and Memory— as described in the following table:

Picture settings are factory preset but you can adjust them individually as follows:

Adjusting the picture preference

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Pictu r e”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

Picture settings

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Pictu r e”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Pictu r e Setting”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

The Pictu r e Setting menu will appea r .

Picture

Pic t ure Se tt ing

Pic t ure Preference

Pic t ure Size

Film Mode

DNR

Spor t s

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Pictu r e P r efe r ence”.

Picture

Pic t ure Se tt ing

Pic t ure Preference

Pic t ure Size

Film Mode

DNR

Spor t s

: Select : Adjust

P r ess ϵ o r ϶ to select a mode you want to adjust.

Picture

Pic t ure Se tt ing

Pic t ure Preference

Pic t ure Size

Film Mode

DNR

S ta nd a rd

: Select : Adjust

Mode

Spo r ts

Picture Quality

Bright and dynamic picture (factory-set)

Standa r d

Standard picture quality (factory-set)

Movie

Movie-like picture setting (factory-set)

Memo r y

Your personal preferences (set by you; see “Picture settings” at right).

Afte r you r desi r ed setting, p r ess EXIT/

CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select the item you want to adjust. P r ess ϵ o r ϶ to adjust the setting.

Picture Setting

Brigh t ness

Con t r a s t

Sh a rpness

Color

Tin t

Color Temper at ure

Cool

: Select : Adjust ENTER:Set

B r ightness

decrease brightness

Cont r ast

decrease contrast

Sha r pness

makes picture softer

Colo r

Tint

increase brightness increase contrast makes picture clearer

϶ be pale color be brilliant color be reddish color be greenish color

Color Temperature

Cool

Standa r d

Wa r m

Picture Quality

Bluish

Neutral

Reddish

Afte r you r desi r ed setting, p r ess EXIT/

CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

Note:

• The Contrast default setting is set to maximum at the factory.

TV ope r ation

Viewing the wide-screen picture formats

You can view programs in a variety of picture sizes— Natural, Theather

Wide1, Theather Wide2, Theather Wide3 and Full.

0-4

ENTER

/ /

EXIT/CANCEL

PIC SIZE

Viewing the wide-screen picture formats

P r ess MENU. P r ess ϳ

o r

to select “Pictu r e”, then p r ess

o r ENTER.

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Pictu r e Size”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER to display Pictu r e Size menu. P r ess ϳ / ϴ o r co rr esponding Numbe r button (0-4) to select the desi r ed pictu r e size, as desc r ibed below.

Picture Size

0.Natural

1.Theater Wide1

2.Theater Wide2

3.Theater Wide3

4.Full

Theate r Wide2 pictu r e size (fo r lette r box p r og r ams)

The entire picture is uniformly enlarged—it is stretched the same amount both wider and taller (retains its original proportion).

The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden.

A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Theate r Wide 3 pictu r e size (fo r lette r box p r og r ams with subtitles)

To fill the width of the screen, it is extended horizontally.

However; it is only slightly extended at the top and the bottom.

The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden.

[0-4]:Select

Note:

• Selectable picture sizes may vary depending on the

• input source or broadcast signal.

Picture Size menu also can be displayed by pressing

PIC SIZE

on the remote control.

P r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

Natu r al pictu r e size

In some cases, this image will display the size of standard 4:3 with a black side bar.

A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Full pictu r e size (fo r 16:9 sou r ce p r og r ams)

Full will display the picture at the maximum size.

Theate r Wide1 pictu r e size (fo r 4: 3 fo r mat p r og r ams)

To fill the screen, the right and left edges are extended, however; the center of the picture remains near its former ratio.

The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden.

Note:

• Some High Definition and/or Digital broadcasts may

• not allow you to change the picture size.

In 720p or 1080i signal, only the Theater Wide2 and

Full picture size features are available.

TV ope r ation

Sound control adjustment/

Selecting Stereo/Second Audio Program (SAP)

The multi-channel TV sound (MTS) feature provides high-fidelity stereo sound.

MTS also can transmit a second audio program (SAP) containing a second language or other audio information.

When the TV/DVD receives a stereo or SAP broadcast, the word “Stereo” or

“SAP” displays on-screen every time you press

DISPLAY

Sound control adjustment

DISPLAY

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

Selecting Stereo/Second

Audio Program (SAP)

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Audio” , then p r ess

o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. P r ess ϳ

o r

to select “Audio”, then p r ess

o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ

o r

to select the item you want to adjust. Then p r ess ϵ o r ϶ to adjust each setting.

Audio

B a ss

Treble

B a l a nce

MTS

Audio L a ngu a ge

S t ereo

English

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “MTS”, then p r ess ϵ o r

to select “Ste r eo”.

Audio

B a ss

Treble

B a l a nce

MTS

Audio L a ngu a ge

S t ereo

English

: Select : Adjust

Bass:

T r eble:

Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the bass sound.

Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the treble sound.

Balance:

Press ϵ or ϶ to obtain an equal sound level from both speakers.

: Select : Adjust

P r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

Afte r you r desi r ed setting, p r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

Note:

• Generally you can leave your TV in stereo mode

• because the TV automatically outputs the type of sound being broadcast (stereo or mono).

If the stereo sound is noisy, select “Mono” to reduce the noise.

To listen to a second audio p r og r am (SAP)

Press ϵ

to select “SAP” in step 2 above. The TV speakers will output the second audio program instead of normal audio.

Film Mode

Film Mode/DNR

A smoother motion may be obtained by setting the Film Mode to “On” when you view a DVD.

DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) can reduce the roughness of the picture.

(This function is available only for analog broadcast.)

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ

o r

to select

“Pictu r e”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

DNR

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. Then p r ess ϳ o r

to select “Pictu r e”, then p r ess

o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Film Mode”.

Picture

Pic t ure Se tt ing

Pic t ure Preference

Pic t ure Size

Film Mode

DNR

: Select : Adjust

Spor t s

P r ess ϵ o r ϶ to select “On” o r “Off”.

Picture

Pic t ure Se tt ing

Pic t ure Preference

Pic t ure Size

Film Mode

DNR

Spor t s

Off

: Select : Adjust

P r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

P r ess ϳ

o r

to select “DNR”.

Picture

Pic t ure Se tt ing

Pic t ure Preference

Pic t ure Size

Film Mode

DNR

Spor t s

: Select : Adjust

P r ess ϵ

o r

to select “On” o r “Off”.

Picture

Pic t ure Se tt ing

Pic t ure Preference

Pic t ure Size

Film Mode

DNR

Spor t s

Off

: Select : Adjust

Note:

• A smoother motion may be obtained by setting the Film

Mode to “On” when you view a DVD from the DVD player connected with ColorStream (component video) inputs.

Selecting the audio language

When two or more audio languages are included in a digital signal, you can select one of the audio language. (This function is available only for digital broadcast.)

0-6

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

Selecting the audio language

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. Then p r ess ϳ o r

ϴ to select “Audio” , then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ / ϴ o r Numbe r buttons (0-6) to select you r desi r ed language.

Audio Language

0. English

1. L a ngu a ge 1

2. L a ngu a ge 2

3. French

4. L a ngu a ge 3

5. Sp a nish

6. No Info

[0-6]: Select

Afte r you r desi r ed setting, p r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Audio Language”, then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER to display the Audio

Language menu.

Audio

B a ss

Treble

B a l a nce

MTS

Audio L a ngu a ge

S t ereo

English

: Select ENTER:Set

TV ope r ation

Using the aspect feature/

Adjusting the back lighting

When the Aspect feature is set to On and the TV receives a 480i signal, the picture size is automatically selected (as described in the following table).

The Backlight feature adjusts the screen brightness for improved picture clarity.

Using the aspect feature

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

Adjusting the back lighting

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Setup” , then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Setup” , then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Aspect”.

P r ess ϵ

o r

to select “On” o r “Off”.

Setup

Closed C a p t ion

L a ngu a ge

Video L a bel

B a ckligh t

Au t o Shu t Off

Aspec t

Rese t

: Select

English

: Adjust

Off

Afte r you r desi r ed setting, p r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

Aspect ratio of signal source

4:3 Normal

16:9 Full

4:3 Letter box

Not deﬁ ned

Automatic aspect size

(When Aspect is On)

Natural

Full

Theater Wide2

User-set mode

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Backlight”.

Setup

Closed C a p t ion

L a ngu a ge

Video L a bel

B a ckligh t

Au t o Shu t Off

Aspec t

Rese t

: Select

English

: Adjust

Off

P r ess ϵ o r ϶ to adjust the setting.

Setup

Closed C a p t ion

L a ngu a ge

Video L a bel

B a ckligh t

Au t o Shu t Off

Aspec t

Rese t

: Select

English

: Adjust

Off

Afte r you r desi r ed setting, p r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

Basic playback

Playing a disc

This section shows you the basics on how to play a disc.

CAUTION

Keep your ﬁ ngers well clear of the disc slot when disc is loading or unloading. Neglecting to do so may cause serious personal injury.

POWER

STOP

PLAY

VOLUME +/–

EJECT

TV/DVD

POWER

VOL

+/–

ENTER

/ / /

PLAY

STOP

DVD

VCD

Basic playback

Preparations:

• When connecting to other equipment, turn the power off.

Press POWER on the unit or on the remote control to turn on the unit

• POWER indicator on the front of the unit changes blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds for a picture to appear on screen.

• Every time you press

POWER

, the TV/DVD starts from TV mode.

• When using an ampliﬁ er, switch on the ampliﬁ er.

On the TV screen, “ ” changes to “Reading” and then playback commences.

Reading

2 Press TV/DVD on the remote control to select DVD mode.

The DVD startup screen will appear on the TV screen.

A menu screen will appear on the TV screen if the disc has a menu feature.

Press

/ or / on the remote control to select title, then press

ENTER

. Title is selected and play commences.

5 Press VOLUME + or – to adjust the volume.

Volume : 25

Load a disc in the disc slot.

Press STOP to end playback.

Resuming facility

• The unit records the stopped point, depending on the disc.

“ ” appears on the screen.

Press

PLAY

to resume playback

(from the scene point).

• If you press

STOP

again

(“ Q ” appears on the TV screen.), the unit will clear the stopped point.

• Load the disc in the disc slot with the label side facing forward. (If the disc has a label.) Hold the disc without touching either of its surfaces, align it with the guides, and place it in position.

• If a disc is inserted during some modes other than

DVD mode, it may switch to DVD mode and then playback may be begun automatically.

To start playback in the stop mode

Press .

Note:

If the unit does not operate properly:

Static electricity, etc., may affect the TV/DVD · s operation. In such case, disconnect the AC cord, then connect it again.

Setting the Auto Shut Off/

Resetting your settings

If the Auto Shut Off feature is On, a station being viewed stops broadcasting and the TV is not operated, the TV will automatically shut itself off after 15 minutes.

The Reset function returns your settings to the factory settings.

Setting the Auto Shut Off

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

Resetting your settings

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ

o r

to select

“Setup” , then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu sc r een will appea r . P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select

“Setup” , then p r ess ϶ o r ENTER.

Main Menu

Pic t ure

Audio

Ch a nnel

Lock

Se t up

: Select ENTER:Set

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Auto Shut Off”.

P r ess ϵ o r ϶ to select “On” o r “Off”.

Setup

Closed C a p t ion

L a ngu a ge

Video L a bel

B a ckligh t

Au t o Shu t Off

Aspec t

Rese t

: Select

English

: Adjust

Off

Afte r you r desi r ed setting, p r ess EXIT/CANCEL to r etu r n to the no r mal sc r een.

P r ess ϳ o r ϴ to select “Reset”.

Setup

Closed C a p t ion

L a ngu a ge

Video L a bel

B a ckligh t

Au t o Shu t Off

Aspec t

Rese t

: Select

English

Off

ENTER:Set

P r ess ϶ o r ENTER to r etu r n you r settings to the facto r y settings.

“Reset” will appea r on the sc r een app r ox. 3 seconds, then it r etu r ns to the no r mal

Note:

• The Reset function returns your adjustments to the following factory settings:

Picture Setting

Brightness ...... center (25)

Contrast ............ max (50)

Sharpness...... center (25)

Color .............. center (25)

Tint ................... center (0)

Color Temperature ... Cool

Picture Preference .... Sports

Film Mode .......................On

Bass................... center (15)

Treble ................ center (15)

Balance................ center (0)

EJECT

POWER

To obtain a higher quality picture

Occasionally, some picture noise may appear on the TV screen while playing a

DVD video disc because the high resolution pictures on these discs include a lot of information. In such case, you may reduce the Sharpness with the Picture

Setting menu

About

DVD VCD CD

The

DVD VCD CD

icons on the heading bar show the playable discs for the function described under that heading.

VCD

: You can use this function with DVD video discs.

: You can use this function with Video CDs.

: You can use this function with Audio CDs and CD-R/RW CDs.

DVD

VCD

Basic playback (continued)

To pause playback (still mode)

Press

PAUSE

during playback.

To resume normal playback, press

PLAY

• The sound is muted during still mode.

PLAY

STOP

PAUSE

To remove the disc

Press

EJECT

Remove the disc after the disc comes out.

To stop playback

Press

STOP

Note:

•

If a non-compatible disc is loaded, “Incorrect Disc”, “Region Code Error” or “Parental Error” will appear on the TV screen according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check your disc again

7 60

•

Some discs may take a minute or so to start playback.

•

When you set a single-faced disc label downwards (ie. the wrong way up), “Reading” will appear on the display for a few minutes and then “Incorrect Disc” will continue to be displayed.

•

Some discs may not work the resuming facility.

•

Resuming cannot function when you play a PBC-featured Video CD while the PBC is on. To turn off the PBC

•

Some playback operations of DVDs may be intentionally ﬁ xed by software producers. Since this unit plays DVDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also refer to the instructions supplied with the DVDs.

•

Do not move the unit during playback. Doing so may damage the disc.

•

Use the to unload and eject the disc.

•

Do not put any objects other than discs on the disc slot. Doing so may cause the unit to malfunctions.

•

In many instances, a menu screen will appear after playback of a movie is completed. Prolonged display of an on-screen menu may damage your television set, permanently etching that image onto its screen. To avoid this, be sure to press

POWER

on the remote control once the movie is completed.

•

There may be a slight delay between the button is pressed and the function activates.

Basic playback

Playing a disc (Continued)

PAUSE

PLAY

SKIP /

REV / FF

SLOW /

DVD

VCD

Playing in fast reverse or fast forward directions

Press REV or FF during playback.

To resume normal playback

Press

PLAY

REV

: Fast reverse playback

: Fast forward playback

Each time you press

REV

button, the playback speed changes.

Note:

• The TV/DVD mutes sound during reverse and forward scan of DVD/VCD/Audio CD discs.

• The playback speed may differ depending on the disc.

DVD

VCD

Playing frame by frame

Press PAUSE during still playback.

Each time you press

PAUSE

, the picture advances one frame.

To resume normal playback

Press

PLAY

Note:

• The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.

DVD

VCD

Playing in slow-motion

Press SLOW (REVERSE) or (FORWARD) during playback.

Each time you press the button, the slow-motion speed changes.

To resume normal playback

Press

PLAY

Note:

• The sound is muted during slow-motion playback.

• The Video CD cannot play Reverse Slow.

DVD

VCD

Locating a chapter or track

Press SKIP or repeatedly to display the chapter or track number you want.

Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.

To locate succeeding chapters or tracks.

Playback starts from the beginning of the current chapter or track.

When you press twice in quick successions, playback starts from the beginning of the preceding chapter or track.

Note:

• A “Prohibition” symbol “ ” may appear at the upper right of the screen. This symbol means either the feature you tried is not

available on the disc, or the TV/DVD cannot access the feature at this time. This does not indicate a problem with the

TV/DVD.

Advanced playback

Marking desired scenes

The unit stores the points that you want to watch again up to 3 points.

You can resume playback from each scene.

DVD

VCD

Marking the scenes

ENTER

EXIT/CANCEL

MARKER

DVD

VCD

Returning to the scenes

1 Press MARKER during playback.

1 Press MARKER during playback or stop mode.

2 Select the blank Marker using or

Then press ENTER to mark the desired scene.

• Repeat this procedure to mark the

other 2 scenes.

2 Press or to select the Marker 1-3.

Press MARKER to clear the display.

Press ENTER.

Playback starts from the marked scene.

Note:

• Some discs may not work with the marking operation.

• The marking is cancelled when you eject the disc or turn the power off.

• Some subtitles recorded around the marker may fail to

appear.

• In case of Video CD with PBC, Marker function is prohibited.

To cancel the Marker

Follow the above steps 1~2, then press

EXIT/CANCEL.

Advanced playback

DVD

VCD

Zooming/Locating desired scene

This unit will allow you to zoom in on the frame image. You can then make selections by switching the position of the frame.

Use the title, chapter and time recorded on the DVD disc to locate the desired point to playback. In the case of VCD/Audio CD discs, time and track are used to locate the desired point to playback.

To check the title/track, chapter/track and time, press

DISPLAY

Zooming

0–9

JUMP

DISPLAY

ZOOM

/ / /

ENTER

EXIT/CANCEL

DVD

VCD

Locating desired scene

1 Press ZOOM during playback.

The center part of the image will be zoomed in.

Each press of

ZOOM

will change the ZOOM 1 (x 1.3), 2 (x 1.5) and 3 (x 2.0).

Press JUMP during playback or stop mode.

Title

Chapter

Time

Jump

Press or to select the “Title/Track”, “Chapter” or “Time”.

Title

Chapter

Time

Jump

Press frame.

/ / / to view a different part of the

You may move the frame from the center position to UP, DOWN,

LEFT or RIGHT direction.

Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the number.

Jump

Title

Chapter

Time

In the zoom mode, press ZOOM repeatedly to return to a 1:1 view ( Off).

• If you input a wrong number, press

EXIT/CANCEL

• Refer to the package supplied with

the disc to check the numbers.

Note:

• You can select the Pause, Slow or Search playback in the

Press ENTER. Playback starts.

• When you change the title,

playback starts from Chapter 1 of

the selected title.

• Some discs may not work in the

• Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.

Note:

•

In case of the Audio CD and Video-CD, only Track and Time can be selected.

• In case of the Video-CD playback with PBC, the JUMP does not work. To turn off PBC, see page

Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback

PLAY MODE

ENTER

PLAY

SKIP /

REPEAT A-B

DVD

VCD

Repeat playback

Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.

DVD

VCD

A-B Repeat playback

A-B repeat playback allows you to repeat a section between two selected points.

Press REPEAT A-B during playback.

The start point is selected.

2 [DVD]

Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Chapter” or “Title”.

The unit automatically starts repeat playback after ﬁ nishing the current title or chapter.

Play Mode

: Off Repeat

[Video CD]

Press to select “Repeat”.

Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Track” or

“All”.

The unit automatically starts repeat playback after ﬁ nishing the current track.

Play Mode

2 Press REPEAT A-B again.

The end point is selected. Playback starts at the point that you selected.

Playback stops at the end point and returns to Point A automatically, then starts again.

A B

• If you set the repeat mode during stop mode,

press to start Repeat playback.

To resume normal playback

Press again.

“

Off

” appears on the screen.

3 Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

Note:

• In A-B Repeat mode, subtitles near the A or B locations

may not be displayed.

• You cannot set the A-B Repeat for the scenes that include

To resume normal playback

Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.

Note:

• Some discs may not work with the repeat operation.

• In case of Video CD with PBC, Repeat function is prohibited during playback.

• Chapter/Track repeat function is canceled whenever

SKIP

or is pressed.

• A-B Repeat playback does not work when Repeat playback

• You may not be able to set A-B Repeat during certain

scenes of the DVD.

• A-B Repeat does not work with an interactive DVD and

• In case of Video CD with PBC, A-B Repeat is prohibited.

Advanced playback

Program playback/Random playback

You can arrange the playback order of tracks on the disc. And the unit can also select tracks at random and playback them. These features work for Video CD.

For Audio CD and MP3/WMA CD, please see “Random playback

(Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG)”

and “Program playback (Audio

CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG)”

0–9

PLAY MODE

ENTER

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

PLAY

Program playback

Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.

Play Mode

1 – – –

2 – – –

3 – – –

Program Playback

2 Press or to select “Mode”, then press

ENTER repeatedly to select “Program”.

Mode

Repeat

Play Mode

: Program

: Off

Program Playback

– – –

Press

to return to the left column, then press

to select the “Program Playback” and press ENTER.

The programs you selected will start to playback in order.

• To resume normal playback,

select Mode: “Off” in step 2.

Mode

Repeat

Play Mode

: Program

: Off

Program Playback

3 Press / to select the programming position.

Press / and then use Number buttons (0–9) to input the track.

• To program others, repeat this step.

• If you input a wrong number, press

EXIT/CANCEL

Mode

Play Mode

: Program

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

– – –

To change the program

1. Select Mode to “Program” (as step 2), press / / /

to select the track number you want to change, then

press .

Press to input the new track

number.

To clear the program one by one

Select Mode to “Program”, press / / / to select the track number. Then press

EXIT/CANCEL

To clear all the programs

At the left column, press / to select “Clear Program”.

Then press

ENTER

Note:

• In playing back the Video CD with PBC, you cannot set

Program playback.

• The program is canceled when you eject the disc or turn the power off.

Random playback

Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.

The Random Playback will start.

Press / to select “Mode”, then press

ENTER repeatedly to select “Random”.

Play Mode

Program Playback

1 – – –

2 – – –

3 – – –

• If you set “Random” during playback mode,

Random playback will begin after the track that is

currently being played has ended.

• To resume normal playback,

select Mode: “Off” in step 2.

Note:

• In case of Video CD with PBC, you cannot set Random function during playback.

• The random playback is canceled when you eject the disc or turn the power off.

Advanced playback

Changing soundtrack language/Subtitles

AUDIO SELECT

SUBTITLE

DVD

VCD

Changing soundtrack language

Subtitles

You can select the language when you play a multilingual disc.

When playing back a disc recorded with subtitles, you can select the subtitle language or turn the subtitle off.

Press AUDIO SELECT during playback.

The current soundtrack language will appear.

1/2 Eng Dolby Digital

Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playback until the desired language is selected.

1/5 Eng

Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly until the desired language is selected.

2/2 Fre Dolby Digital

2 To turn off the subtitle, press SUBTITLE until

“Off” appears.

Off

• The on screen display will disappear after a

• The on screen display will disappear after a few

seconds.

In case of Video CD playback

Audio type changes as follows each time you press

AUDIO

SELECT

LR L R

Note:

• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change subtitles, or to turn subtitles on or off.

• While playing a DVD, the subtitle may change when you loaded or eject the disc.

• In some cases, a selected subtitle language may not be changed immediately.

Note:

• If the desired language is not heard after pressing the button several times, the language is not recorded on the disc.

• The selected soundtrack language is cancelled when

you eject the disc. The initial default language or

available language will be heard if the disc is played back again.

• If you select DTS in playing DTS-encoded disc, no sound will be heard from the TV/DVD · s speakers.

Changing angles/Title selection/

DVD menu

DVD MENU

/ / /

ENTER

PLAY

ANGLE

TOP MENU

Changing angles

When playing back a disc recorded with multi-angle facility, you can change the angle that you are viewing the scene from.

Press ANGLE during playback.

The current angle will appear.

1/2

2 Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle is selected.

Note:

• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the angle even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.

Title selection

Two or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title.

1 Press TOP MENU during playback.

Title menu appears on the screen.

Press ENTER or PLAY.

The playback of the selected title will start.

Press / / / to select the desired title.

Note:

• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to select the title.

• Depending on the DVD, a “title menu” may simply be called a

“menu” or “title” in the instructions supplied with the disc.

DVD menu

Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using the menu.

When you playback these DVDs, you can select the subtitle language, soundtrack language, etc, using the menu.

Press DVD MENU during playback.

The DVD menu appears on the TV screen.

• Press again to resume

playback at the scene when you

pressed .

Press / / / to select the desired item.

Press ENTER.

The menu continues to another screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the item completely.

Note:

• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to resume playback from the scene point when you press

DVD MENU

Disc status/To turn off the PBC

DVD

VCD

Disc status

With press of DISPLAY, the status of the disc will appear on the screen.

To cancel the display, press DISPLAY again.

DISPLAY

PLAY MODE

ENTER

VCD

To turn off the PBC

(see 7 )

Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.

DVD

DISC OPERATION

ELAPSED

TIME

TOTAL

TIME

2 Press / to select “Mode”, then press

ENTER repeatedly until “Off” appear.

Play Mode

1 – – –

2 – – –

3 – – –

Program Playback

TITLE NO.

DVD

Title 1/3

1/1 Eng Dolby Digital

1/1

00:15:25 01:41:39

Chapter 2/24

1/2 Eng

CHAPTER

NO.

ANGLE NO.

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

A KIND OF AUDIO

Video CD

DISC OPERATION

ELAPSED

TIME

TOTAL

TIME

3 Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

To turn on the PBC

Follow the above steps 1~2, then press

ENTER

repeatedly until “PBC” appear.

VCD

Track 3/15

00:08:32 00:51:03

TRACK NO.

Advanced playback

MP3/WMA/JPEG and Audio CD operation

This unit can playback the MP3/WMA/JPEG-data which has been recorded on CD-R or CD-RW. To produce the MP3/

WMA/JPEG-data, you need a Windows-PC with CD-RW drive and a MP3/WMA/JPEG-encoding Software (not supplied).

The Apple-HFS-System cannot be played.

This player requires discs/recordings to meet certain technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality.

There are many different types of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing MP3/WMA ﬁ les). Not all recordable discs will produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria set forth in this owner · s manual are meant only as a guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3 ﬁ les is not recommended.

You must obtain any required permission from copyright owners to download or use copyrighted content.

Toshiba cannot and does not grant such permission.

Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG CD information

Limitations on MP3/WMA/JPEG CD playback

• MP3/WMA/JPEG CD is the disc that is standardized by ISO9660, its ﬁ le name must include 3-digits extension letters,

“.mp3”, “.wma”, “.jpg”.

• MP3/WMA/JPEG CD must be correspond to the ISO standardized ﬁ les.

• This unit can read 2000 fi les per disc. If one disc has more than 2000 fi les, it reads up to 2000 fi les, the remaining fi les will be omitted.

• MP3/WMA/JPEG CDs cannot be used for the purpose of recording.

• If the CD has both audio tracks and MP3/WMA/JPEG ﬁ les, only audio tracks will be played.

• It may take more than one minute for this unit to read MP3/WMA/JPEG ﬁ les depending on its structure.

• Music recorded by “Joliet Recording Specifi cation” can be played back, the fi le name is displayed (within 15 letters) on the screen. Long fi le names will be condensed.

• The music ﬁ les recorded by “Hierarchical File System” (HFS) cannot be played.

Limitations on display

• The maximum number for display is 15 letters.

Available letters for display are the following: capital or small alphabets of A through Z, numbers of 0 through 9, and _ (under score).

• Other letters than those above are replaced in hyphen.

Notes on MP3/WMA/JPEG ﬁ

To playback MP3/WMA/JPEG CD in the recorded order,

1. Use MP3/WMA/JPEG software that records data alphabetically or numerically.

2. Name each ﬁ le including two-digit or three-digit number (ex. “01” “02” or “001” “002”).

3. Refrain from making too many sub-folders.

CAUTION:

• Some MP3/WMA/JPEG CDs cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.

• The CD-R/RW that has no music data or non MP3/WMA/JPEG ﬁ les cannot be played back.

Standard, sampling frequency and the bit rate:

MP3 CD

32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz

32kbps ~ 320kbps (constant bit rate or variable bit rate)

The recommend recording setting for a high-quality sound is 44.1kHz of sampling frequency and 128kbps of constant bit rate.

WMA CD

WMA version 7 and 8

32kHz/48kbps, 44.1kHz/48kbps~192kbps, 48kHz/128kbps~192kbps

The ﬁ le recorded by mono, 48kHz, 48 kbps is not available to this unit.

Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

Advanced playback

MP3/WMA/JPEG and Audio CD operation (Continued)

JPEG playback

ZOOM

DVD MENU

ENTER

/ / /

PAUSE

STOP

PLAY

SKIP

ANGLE

TOP MENU

Slide show playback

1 Load a JPEG disc in the disc slot.

2 A ﬁ le browser screen will appear on the screen.

/Picture-01.JPG

Picture-01

Picture-02

Picture-03

Picture-04

Picture-05

Picture-06

Picture-07

Picture-08

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

JPEG Preview

W: 2048 H: 1536

3 Press

/ to select the ﬁ le.

To display a thumbnail list, press

DVD MENU

Press / / / to select the desired ﬁ le.

(To return to the ﬁ le browser, press

TOP MENU

The slide show enables you to view pictures (ﬁ les) one after another automatically.

Preparation:

• Set “JPEG Interval” setting to “5 Seconds”, “10 Seconds” or “15 Seconds”

Select your desired starting ﬁ le for the slide show in the step 3 on left.

2 Press ENTER or PLAY to start slide show from the selected ﬁ le.

• When

PLAY

is pressed after the fi le browser displayed, playback begins automatically starting from the fi rst fi le. In this case, if the fi rst fi le is a JPEG fi le, the fi rst JPEG fi le is played back. If the fi rst fi le is an MP3/WMA fi le, only MP3/WMA fi les are played back in order. If there is no fi le at a root directory, playback does not begin automatically.

•

If you press

PAUSE

during the slide show, the slide show stops temporary. “

” appears brieﬂ y on the TV screen.

Press or

SKIP

again to resume the slide show.

• If the picture appears upside down or sideways, press

ANGLE

repeatedly until it · s right side up.

“ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the TV screen.

• When the slide show playback ﬁ nished, the ﬁ le list appears.

• To stop the slide show, press

STOP

. The ﬁ le browser appears.

Press ENTER or PLAY. The selected picture appears on the screen.

Rotating an image

You can rotate an image by 90 degrees.

Press

ANGLE

during playback of the image.

“ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the screen.

Zooming an image

Zoom function also can be used in viewing JPEG ﬁ les. Press

ZOOM

(See “Zooming”

Note:

• During JPEG playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B

Repeat functions.

• When an image exceeds 5760 x 3840 pixels, the entire image may not be displayed on a screen, preview window or thumbnail list.

• It may have a longer interval due to the size of data.

5 Press STOP to end playback

The ﬁ le browser appears on the screen. If you want to watch the other ﬁ le, repeat steps 3 ~ 4.

/ / /

ENTER

STOP

PLAY

RETURN

MP3/WMA and Audio CD playback

1 Load an Audio CD or a disc on which MP3 or WMA ﬁ les have been recorded in the disc slot.

2 A ﬁ

/ to select ﬁ

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

W M A -1

W M A -2

W M A -3

S elect Files

Repeat :O ff

Mode :O ff

JPEG Pre v ie w

About ﬁ le menu

3 / 15 00:00:00

/W M A -11.

W M A

MP3-5

MP3-6

W M A -11

W M A -12

Picture-1

Picture-2

Picture-3

Picture-4

S elect Files

Repeat :O ff

Mode :O ff

Music Pla y ing

Press

/MP3-2.MP3

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

WMA-2

WMA-3

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

JPEG Preview

• In case the current directory includes more than 8 ﬁ les, press or to scroll in the ﬁ le list.

• To see contents in folder, select the folder and then press

ENTER

. To return to the parent directory, press

RETURN

or select “ Go Up ...” then press

ENTER

• When

PLAY

is pressed after the fi le browser displayed, playback begins automatically starting from the fi rst fi le. In this case, if the fi rst fi le is an

MP3/WMA fi le, only MP3/WMA fi les are played back in order. If the fi rst fi le is a JPEG fi le, the fi rst

JPEG ﬁ le is played back. If there is no ﬁ le at a root directory, playback does not begin automatically.

Press ENTER.

The selected ﬁ le starts playing back.

Note:

• In the case of a CD containing a mixture of MP3, WMA and JPEG fi les, the fi les are played back by selecting them from the fi le browser.

• MP3 or WMA ﬁ le on the Kodak Picture CD is not recognized on this unit.

Note:

• During MP3/WMA playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B

Repeat functions.

• You can use Repeat (Track or All), Random functions and

Program playback for Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG playback

55 56

5 Press STOP to end playback.

Select Files

The ﬁ le type to make it display in the ﬁ le browser can be chosen.

1.Press

or to highlight “Select Files” at right column in the ﬁ le browser.

2. Press

ENTER

, then press or to select ﬁ le type from the list (Music or Picture).

3. Press

ENTER

to add/remove check mark. Checked ﬁ le type will be displayed in the ﬁ le browser.

4. Press

RETURN

to save the setting.

• The unit records the stopped point. “ ” appears on the TV screen. Press

PLAY

to resume playback

(from the scene point).

• If you press

STOP

again or unload the disc, the unit will clear the stopped point.

Repeat, random and program playback using file browser

/ / /

ENTER

PLAY

SKIP /

Repeat playback (Audio CD/

MP3/WMA/JPEG)

Random playback (Audio CD/

MP3/WMA/JPEG)

In the ﬁ / /

“Repeat” during stop mode.

/ to select

In the ﬁ / /

“Mode” during stop mode.

/ to select

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Track” or

“All”.

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

Press ENTER to select “Random”.

Select Files

Repeat

Mode

:Off

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3 3

Select Files

Repeat :Track

Mode :Off

Press PLAY.

The unit automatically starts repeat playback after ﬁ nishing the current track.

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Random

Press PLAY.

The random playback will start.

To resume normal playback

Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.

To resume normal playback

Select Mode : “Off” in step 2.

Note:

• The repeat function is canceled when you eject the disc or turn the power off.

• Track repeat function is canceled whenever SKIP

is pressed.

Note:

• The random function is canceled when you eject the disc or turn the power off.

Advanced playback

Repeat, random and program playback using file browser (Continued)

/ / /

ENTER

PLAY

1 In the ﬁ /

“Edit Mode”, then press ENTER.

/ to select 4 Press / to select “Program View”, then press

ENTER. Program View shows only the programmed ﬁ

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Edit Mode

MP3 3

When “Edit Mode” is black color, you can mark the ﬁ les which you want to add into

Program list.

Program View

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-3

Edit Mode

Browser View

Clear Program

JPEG Preview

2 Press / / / to select add into the program list.

ﬁ

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Edit Mode

WMA-1

WMA 2

JPEG Preview

Press

ENTER

. Selected ﬁ le was marked.

Repeat this procedure to select the other ﬁ les.

Browser View

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

WMA-2

WMA-3

Edit Mode

Program View

Add To Program

JPEG Preview

In the Program View, press PLAY. The ﬁ start to playback in programed order that were added by you.

3 / to select “Add To Program”.

Then press ENTER. All marked ﬁ into the program list.

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

WMA 2

Edit Mode

Program View

Add To Program

JPEG Preview

When you ﬁ nish storing the ﬁ les which you want into the Program list, select “Edit Mode” and press

ENTER

to release edit mode.

To remove ﬁ

In the Edit Mode, switch to Program View. Select ﬁ le you want to remove, then press

ENTER

. Select “Clear

Program” and press

ENTER

. Marked ﬁ le is removed from program list.

Note:

•

The program function is cancelled when you eject the disc or turn the power off.

Func t ion se t up

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Se tt ing de t ails

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Menu, Sub t i t le, A udio

You can select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and

“Audio” if more than one languages are recorded onto the disc.

English, Francais, Espanol:

The selected language will be heard or seen.

O t her:

Other language can be selected (see “Language code list”

Original ( A udio):

The unit will select the ﬁ rst priority language of each disc.

Off (Sub t i t le):

Subtitles do not appear.

T V Screen

You have the following screen sizes to choose from:

4:3 (Le tt er box):

When playing back a wide screen-DVD disc, it displays the wide picture with black bands at the top and bottom of screen.

4:3 (Pan & scan):

It displays the wide picture on the whole screen with left and right edges automatically cut off.

16:9 (Wide):

A wide screen picture is displayed full size.

No t e:

• If the DVD disc is not formatted in the Pan & scan style, it will display 4:3 style.

No t e:

• If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the ﬁ rst-priority language is selected.

• If you want to change the OSD language, you can perform it by “Language” in the TV menu

Displa y

On screen display can be switched on or off when you press any buttons.

press any buttons.

the buttons (factory setting).

Function setup

TV/DVD

Customizing the function settings

You can change the default settings of the DVD mode to customize performance to your preference.

Press

TV/DVD

on the remote control to select DVD mode.

/ / /

ENTER

SETUP

RETURN

DVD

VCD

Setting procedure

1 Press SETUP during stop mode.

The following on-screen display appears.

4 Then press or ENTER. The selectable settings will appear.

QSound :

16:9

Pi t

2 Press or to select the desired section, then press

Change the selection using or , by referring to the corresponding pages

Press ENTER to save the setting.

• Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 to

change other option.

• To select another section, go back to step 2 by pressing repeatedly.

First option will be highlighted. Press or to select the desired option.

To clear SETUP screen, press SETUP once or press RETURN repeatedly.

Se tt ing de t ails

Section Option Details

Menu Subtitle

Audio

To select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and “Audio”

if more than one language are available on the disc.

TV Screen

Display

Picture Mode

To select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your TV.

To turn On or Off the operational status display on the TV screen.

To select a preferred picture mode from “Video”, “Film” or “Auto”.

JPEG Interval

To select a preferred setting for the slide show playback.

Night Mode

Digital Out

Parental

To select On or Off for Night Mode.

To select a digital output sound format corresponding to your system connection.

To select a preferred parental level for the parental setting.

Password

To change the password.

Page

Pic t ure Mode

There are two types of source content in pictures recorded in DVD video discs: ﬁ lm content (pictures recorded from ﬁ lms at 24 frames per second) and video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per second). Make this selection according to the type of content being viewed.

A u t o:

Select this selection normally.

The DVD player automatically detects source content, ﬁ lm or video of playback source, and converts that signal in an appropriate method.

Film:

The DVD player converts ﬁ lm content pictures appropriately. Suitable for playback of ﬁ lm content pictures.

V ideo:

The DVD player ﬁ lters video signal and converts it appropriately.

Suitable for playback of video content pictures.

No t e:

• Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or doubled. In this case, select “Video”.

JPEG In t er v al

You can continuously playback all JPEG ﬁ les automatically.

After the selection below, the disc will start playback on

JPEG ﬁ les which have been recorded.

Off:

Plays back one ﬁ le at a time.

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at

5 second intervals.

Ϯ Night Mode

Set Pass w English

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Night Mode enables you to control the dynamic range so as to achieve a suitable sound for your equipment.

Off:

It plays back at the recording level on the disc.

On:

Loud sound such as explosion is toned down slightly when played back. This is suitable when it is connected to a stereo.

Note:

•

This function works only when the disc recorded with

Dolby Digital is played back.

The level of Night Mode may differ depending on DVD video disc.

Ϯ Digital Out

You can select the digital output sound format corresponding to your system connection.

Off:

There is no sound output from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack.

PCM:

Change Dolby Digital to PCM for the output.

Select when connected to a 2 channel digital stereo amplifier.

Bitst r eam:

Disc audio bitstream data will be output.

Note:

• Even if you select “Bitstream”, MPEG Audio will be output in PCM format.

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at

10 second intervals.

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at

15 second intervals.

Func t ion se t up

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Se tt ing de t ails (con t inued)

Se t t he new password

Paren t al con t rol se tt ing

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Some discs are speciﬁ ed as not suitable for children. Such discs can be limited not to playback with the unit.

1) Press or to select “Parental”, then press

2) Press “0000” using

Number bu

(Please note, this is pre-setting password of this press

tt ons (0–9)

. The parental level list

1) Press or to select “Password”, then press

ENTER

. “Enter Current Password” screen will appear.

2) Press

tt ons (0–9)

to input the current password (If the password has not been set yet after you purchase this unit, it is “0000”).

3) Then press . “Enter New Password” screen will appear. Press

Number bu tt ons (0–9)

to input the new password.

4) Press . Now your new password has been set. Be sure to remember this number!

If y ou forge t t he password

1) Press to remove the disc.

2) While holding down on the remote control and press on the unit. “Password Clear” appears on the screen. Now the password has been returned to the initial value (“0000”).

•

Le v el Off

: The parental control setting does not function.

•

Le v el 8

: Virtually all DVD software can be

•

Le v el 1

: DVD software for adults cannot be

3) Press or to select from the level 1 to level 8.

The limitation will be more severe as the level number is lower. Then press

ENTER

No t e:

• The parental control level is equivalent to the following

USA movie ratings.

Level 1: G

Level 2:

Level 5:

Level 6: R

Level 3: PG Level 7: NC-17

Level 4: PG-13 Level 8:

No t e:

• If each setup (pages

) has completed, the unit can always work under the same condition (especially with

DVD discs).

Each setup will be retained in the memory even if you turn the power off.

The parental control levels for other countries/area

than U.S. are included for future use. Check the

appropriate parental control level when you buy a DVD video disc equipped with the parental control feature in the future.

• Depending on the discs, the unit cannot limit playback.

• Some discs may not be encoded with speciﬁ c rating

level information though its disc jacket says “adult.”

For those discs, the age restriction will not work.

• The password is required every time when you change the parental level.

• If you input a wrong number, press

E X IT/C A NCEL

O t hers

Understanding the Power Return feature

If the power is cut off while you are viewing the TV/DVD and the power is resupplied, the Power Return feature will turn the TV/DVD on automatically. If the power is going to be off for a long time or you are going to be away from the

TV/DVD for a long time, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to prevent the TV/DVD from turning on in your absence.

Troubleshooting

Use the following check list for troubleshooting when you have problems with your unit. Consult your local dealer or service outlet if problems persist.

Be sure all connections are properly made when using with other units.

SYMPTOMS POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS

POWER

TV/DVD does not operate.

• Make sure the connection of AC cord is secured.

• Try another AC outlet.

• Unplug unit, then plug it back in.

T V BRO A DC A ST RECEPTION

Poor sound or No sound.

Poor picture or No picture.

Poor reception on some channels.

Poor color or no color.

Picture wobbles or drifts.

No CATV reception.

Horizontal or diagonal bars on screen.

No reception above channel 13.

TV shuts off.

Closed - Caption is not activated.

Display is not shown in your language.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Check Volume adjustments or mute.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

• Check Picture setting.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Station signal is weak, reorient antenna to receive weaker station.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Make sure channels are set into memory.

• Check Picture setting.

• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Make sure channels are set into memory.

• Cable TV company is scrambling signal.

• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.

• Check all Cable TV connections.

• Set Air/Cable selection to the Cable position.

• Station or Cable TV system problems, try another station.

• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

• Make sure Air/Cable selection is in the appropriate position.

• If antenna is used, check UHF antenna connections.

• Auto shut off feature worked.

• Sleep Timer is set.

• Power interrupted.

• TV station experiencing problems or program tuned is not closed

captioned. Try another channel.

• Check Cable TV connection or VHF/UHF antenna, reposition or

rotate antenna.

• Set “CC Setting” to “On” to turn on the closed caption decoder.

• Select proper language in the menu options.

P A GE

25, 26

14, 15

D V D

Temporar y cancel t he ra t ing le v el b y D V D disc

Load a D V D disc.

If t he D V D disc has been designed t o t emporaril y cancel t he Ra t ing le v el, t he screen which follows t he “Reading” screen will change, depending on which disc is pla y ed.

If y ou selec t “YES” wi t h t he ENTER ke y , password inpu t screen will t hen appear.

• If “NO” is selec t ed, press EJECT t o remo v e t he disc.

3 En t er t he password wi t h Number bu tt ons (0–9).

Then press ENTER.

To exit from the entry, press

RETURN

Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc

Depending on the DVD disc, the disc may try to temporarily cancel the rating level that you have set.

It is up to you to decide whether to cancel the rating level or not.

Enter Pass w ord

Pla y back will commence if t he en t ered password is correc t .

EJECT

0–9

ENTER

RETURN

No t e:

• This temporary cancellation of rating level will be kept until the disc is ejected.

When the disc is ejected, the original rating level will be set again automatically.

SYMPTOMS POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS

D V D

Playback doesn

No picture.

No sound.

No subtitle.

· t start.

Angle cannot be changed.

“ ” appears on the screen.

REMOTE CONTROL

• No disc is loaded.

• The disc may be dirty. Clean up the disc.

• The unit cannot play CD-ROMs, etc.

• TV/DVD selector is not set correctly.

• Check the input selector of the ampliﬁ er is set properly.

• The unit is in the special playback mode.

• Select the correct Audio Input/Output position on AV ampliﬁ er.

Picture is distorted during fast reverse/forward playback.

Stopping playback, search, slowmotion play, repeat play, or program play, etc. cannot be performed.

No on-screen display.

The unit or remote operation key is not functioning.

Playback does not start when the title is selected.

Audio soundtrack and/or subtitle language is not changed when you playback a DVD.

• The picture will be distorted occasionally.

• Some discs may not do some of the functions.

• Set Display to On.

• Turn off the unit and unplug the AC power cord for several minutes, then replug it.

• Check the Parental setup.

• Multilingual language is not recorded on the DVD disc.

• Some discs have no subtitles.

• Subtitles are cleared. Press

SUBTITLE

• Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD disc.

• The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc.

The remote control does not function.

• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor.

• Operate within approx. 5 meters or reduce the light in the room.

• Clear the path of the beam.

• The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries.

• Check the batteries are inserted correctly.

P A GE

18, 19

O t hers

Reception disturbances

Most types of television interference can be remedied by adjusting the height and position of the VHF/UHF antenna.

Outdoor antennas are recommended for best results. The most common types of television interference are shown below. If one of these symptoms appear when the TV/DVD is connected to a Cable TV system, the disturbance may be caused by the local Cable TV company broadcast.

IGNITION

Black spots or horizontal streaks may appear, the picture may ﬂ utter or drift. Usually caused by interference from automobile ignition systems, neon lamps or AC powered tools and appliances such as drills or hair dryers.

GHOSTS

Ghosts are caused by the television signal following two paths. One is the direct path and the other is reﬂ ected by tall buildings, hills or other large objects. Changing the direction or position of the antenna may improve the reception.

SNOW

If the TV/DVD is located far from the TV station, in a fringe reception area where the signal is weak, small dots may appear in the picture.

If the signal is extremely weak, the installation of a larger external antenna may be necessary.

R A DIO FRE Q UENCY INTERFERENCE (RFI)

Caused by two-way radios, this type of interference produces moving ripples or diagonal streaks in the picture. Some cases may cause a loss of contrast in the picture. Changing the direction and position of the antenna or installing an RFI ﬁ lter may improve the picture.

C A RE A ND M A INTEN A NCE

To prevent ﬁ re or shock hazard, disconnect the TV/DVD from the power source before cleaning.

Use caution when cleaning or wiping the plastic parts.

O t hers

Specifications

Model 15L V 505

General

Power supply

Power consumption

Weight

Dimensions

AC 120V 60Hz

Operation: 35 W, Stand by: 0.8 W

7.7 lbs (3.5 kg)

Width: 15-13/16 inches (402 mm)

Height: 12-5/8 inches (320 mm)

Depth: 5-1/2 inches (140.1 mm)

5°C-40°C (41°F-104°F)

Less than 80% RH (No condensation)

Operating temperature

Operating humidity

Tele v ision

LCD panel (Screen size is approximate.)

Display method

Number of pixels

Television system

Receiving channels

15-inch diagonal

Color TFT LCD

1366 (Horizontal) x 768 (Vertical)

NTSC standard, ATSC standard (8VSB), QAM

VHF: 2-13

UHF: 14-69

CATV: 1-125 (4A, A-5~A-1, A~I, J~W, W+1~W+84)

VHF/UHF 75 ohm

1-3/16 x 2-13/16 inches (30.5 x 71.1 mm), 8 ohm x 2

1.5W + 1.5W

Antenna input

Speaker

Audio output power

D V D/CD pla y er

Signal system

Applicable disc

NTSC

1. DVD (12cm, 8cm)

2. CD (12cm, 8cm)

1-Lens, 2-Beams System Pickup

Inpu t /Ou t pu t

S-Video input

ColorStream video input

(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync., Mini DIN 4-pin x 1

(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync., pin jack x 1

(PB, PR) 0.7 V (p-p), 75 ohm, pin jack x 2

Video input

Audio input

Digital audio output (Coaxial)

Headphone

1.0 V (p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync., pin jack x 1

–8dBm, 50 kohm, negative sync., pin jack (L/R) x 2

0.5 V (p-p), 75 ohm, pin jack x 1

ø3.5mm stereo mini jack x 1

A ccessories

Remote control (SE-R0305) ................................................................................................... 1

Batteries (R03/AAA) .............................................................................................................. 2

AC cord .................................................................................................................................. 1

Owner

· s manual (this booklet) ..................................................... .......................................... 1

Quick setup guide (Spanish) .................................................................................................. 1

• This model complies with the above speciﬁ cations.

• Designs and speciﬁ cations are subject to change without notice.

• This model may not be compatible with features and/or speciﬁ cations that may be added in the future.

Language code list

Enter the appropriate code number for the initial settings “Menu”, “Subtitle” and/or “Audio”

Language Name

Abkhazian

Afar

Afrikaans

Albanian

Amharic

Arabic

Armenian

Assamese

Aymara

Azerbaijani

Bashkir

Basque

Bengali; Bangla

Bhutani

Bihari

Breton

Bulgarian

Burmese

Byelorussian

Cambodian

Catalan

Chinese

Corsican

Croatian

Czech

Danish

Dutch

English

Esperanto

Estonian

Faroese

1828

1329

1411

2422

1524

1525

1530

1625

2335

1215

2123

1311

3618

1325

1224

1436

1218

1228

1217

1835

1129

1135

1136

1211

1531

Code Language Name

1112 Fiji

1111

1116

2927

1123

1128

Finnish

French

Frisian

Galician

Georgian

German

Greek

Greenlandic

Guarani

Gujarati

Hausa

Hebrew

Hindi

Hungarian

Icelandic

Indonesian

Interlingua

Irish

Italian

Japanese

Javanese

Kannada

Kashmiri

Kazakh

Kirghiz

Korean

Kurdish

Laothian

Latin

Latvian, Lettish

Language Name

Lingala

Lithuanian

Macedonian

Malagasy

Malay

Malayalam

Maltese

Maori

Marathi

Moldavian

Mongolian

Nauru

Nepali

Norwegian

Oriya

Panjabi

Pashto, Pushto

Persian

Polish

Portuguese

Quechua

Rhaeto-Romance

Romanian

Russian

Samoan

Sanskrit

Scots Gaelic

Serbian

Serbo-Croatian

Shona

Sindhi

1911

1711

1930

2011

2033

2124

1933

1819

1831

1929

1924

1415

1522

2122

1724

1731

1811

Code

1620

1619

1628

1635

1722

2111

2129

2121

2135

2125

2131

2225

2211

2232

2831

2923

2911

1714

2928

2918

2924

2914

1611

2622

2630

2731

2823

2825

2415

2425

2528

2611

2629

2330

2319

2328

2325

2324

2411

Code Language Name

2224 Singhalese

2230

2321

2317

2329

2322

Slovak

Slovenian

Somali

Spanish

Sundanese

Swahili

Swedish

Tagalog

Tajik

Tamil

Tatar

Telugu

Thai

Tibetan

Tigrinya

Tonga

Turkish

Turkmen

Twi

Ukrainian

Urdu

Uzbek

Vietnamese

Volapük

Welsh

Wolof

Xhosa

Yiddish

Yoruba

Zulu

3028

3021

3033

3121

3128

3136

3015

3018

1225

3019

3025

2933

2932

3022

3017

3011

3030

Code

2919

2921

2922

2925

1529

2931

3219

3225

1335

3325

3418

2019

3525

3631

Limi t ed Uni t ed S t a t es Warran ty

LCD T V /D V D Combina t ion - Depo t Repair Warran ty

Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following limited warranties to original consumers in the United States. THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER

PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION AS A GIFT FROM THE

ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.

LCD TV/DVD COMBINATIONS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE

OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED

BY THESE WARRANTIES.

LCD TV/DVD COMBINATIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING,

WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED

BY THESE WARRANTIES.

Limi t ed One (1) Year Warran ty on Par t s and Labor

TACP warrants this LCD TV/DVD Combination and its parts against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail purchase. DURING

THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP · S OPTION,

REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH

A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT

CHARGE TO YOU.

Your Responsibili ty

THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO

THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

(1) You must retain your bill of sale or provide other proof of purchase.

(2) All warranty servicing of this LCD TV/DVD

Combination must be made by the Depot

Warranty Repair Center speciﬁ ed by the TACP

Consumer Solutions Center.

Ren t al Uni t s

The warranty for LCD TV/DVD Combination rental units begins on the date of the ﬁ rst rental or thirty

(30) days after the date of shipment to the rental ﬁ rm, whichever comes ﬁ rst.

(3) The warranties from TACP are effective only if the LCD TV/DVD Combination is purchased and operated in the Continental U.S.A. or

Puerto Rico.

Commercial Uni t s

LCD TV/DVD Combinations sold and used for commercial purposes have a limited warranty for all parts and labor, which warranty begins on the date of original retail purchase and ends on the date that is ninety (90) days thereafter.

(4) Labor service charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer controls, and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered by this warranty. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna systems are your responsibility.

Owner · s Manual and Produc t Regis t ra t ion Card

Read this owner · s manual thoroughly before operating this LCD TV/DVD Combination.

Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your LCD TV/DVD Combination online at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as possible. By registering your LCD TV/DVD

Combination you will enable TACP to bring you new products speciﬁ cally designed to meet your needs and help us to contact you in the unlikely event a safety notiﬁ cation is required under the

U.S. Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to complete and return the product registration card does not diminish your warranty rights.

(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited above, and do not extend to any LCD TV/DVD Combination or parts that have been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the LCD TV/DVD Combination or parts caused by ﬁ res, misuse, accident,

Acts of God (such as lightning or ﬂ uctuations in electric power), improper installation, improper maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TACP; use or malfunction through simultaneous use of this LCD TV/DVD

Combination and connected equipment; or to units that have been modiﬁ ed or had the serial number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.

CAUTION

THIS LCD COLOR TELEVISION EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.

TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS SERVICE MANUAL CARE-

FULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTENANCE,

CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION-SEE SERVICE PROCEDURE.

USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN

THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE.

TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLOSURE.

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. DO NOT

STARE INTO BEAM.

Location of the required Marking

The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA

RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS,

21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

PREPARATION OF SERVICING

The laser diode used for a pickup head may be destroyed with external static electricity.

Moreover, even if it is operating normally after repair, when static electricity discharge is received at the time of repair, the life of the product may be shortened.

Please perform the following measure against static electricity, be careful of destruction of a laser diode at the time of repair.

• Place the unit on a workstation equipped to protect against static electricity, such as conductive mat.

• Soldering iron with ground wire or ceramic type is used.

• A worker needs to use a ground conductive wrist strap for body.

A1-1

SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING

1. KEEP THE NOTICES

As for the places which need special attentions, they are indicated with the labels or seals on the cabinet, chassis and parts. Make sure to keep the indications and notices in the operation manual.

2. AVOID AN ELECTRIC SHOCK

There is a high voltage part inside. Avoid an electric shock while the electric current is flowing.

3. USE THE DESIGNATED PARTS

The parts in this equipment have the specific characters of incombustibility and withstand voltage for safety. Therefore, the part which is replaced should be used the part which has the same character.

Especially as to the important parts for safety which is indicated in the circuit diagram or the table of parts as a mark, the designated parts must be used.

4. BE CAREFUL WITH THE

LCD PANEL

Avoid a shock to the panel while servicing.

Take enough care to deal with it.

5. PUT PARTS AND WIRES IN THE

ORIGINAL POSITION AFTER

ASSEMBLING OR WIRING

There are parts which use the insulation material such as a tube or tape for safety, or which are assembled in the condition that these do not contact with the printed board.

The inside wiring is designed not to get closer to the pyrogenic parts and high voltage parts.

Therefore, put these parts in the original positions.

6. PERFORM A SAFETY CHECK AFTER

SERVICING

Confirm that the screws, parts and wiring which were removed in order to service are put in the original positions, or whether there are the portions which are deteriorated around the serviced places serviced or not. Check the insulation between the antenna terminal or external metal and the AC cord plug blades.

And be sure the safety of that.

(INSULATION CHECK PROCEDURE)

Unplug the plug from the AC outlet.

Remove the antenna terminal on TV and turn

on the TV.

Insulation resistance between the cord plug terminals and the eternal exposure metal

[Note 2] should be more than 1M ohm by using the 500V insulation resistance meter

[Note 1].

If the insulation resistance is less than 1M ohm, the inspection repair should be required.

[Note 1]

If you have not the 500V insulation resistance meter, use a Tester.

[Note 2]

External exposure metal: Antenna terminal

Headphone jack

HOW TO ORDER PARTS

Please include the following informations when you order parts. (Particularly the VERSION LETTER.)

1. MODEL NUMBER and VERSION LETTER

The MODEL NUMBER can be found on the back of each product and the VERSION LETTER can be

found at the end of the SERIAL NUMBER.

2. PART NO. and DESCRIPTION

You can find it in your SERVICE MANUAL.

A1-2

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

1) Read these instructions.

2) Keep these instructions.

3) Heed all warnings.

4) Follow all instructions.

5) Do not use this apparatus near water.

6) Clean only with dry cloth.

7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

PORTABLE CART WARNING

(symbol provided by RETAC)

14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or

S3126A

plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

15) Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such a vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.

16) An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as contact with them might be fatal.

17) Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.

18) Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.

A1-3

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

(CONTINUED)

19) If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges, Section 810 of the

National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

ANTENNA LEAD

IN WIRE

GROUND

CLAMP

NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

S2898A

ELECTRIC SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810-20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810-21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250, PART H)

20) When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.

21) Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.

22) Keep your fingers clear of the disc slot as it is closing. It may cause injury.

23) When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock and serious personal injury. Read the owner's manual of the other equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.

24) Reduce the volume to the minimum level before you turn on the product. Otherwise, sudden high volume sound may cause hearing or speaker damage.

A1-4

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

(CONTINUED)

25) Do not allow the product to output distorted sound for an extended period of time. It may cause speaker overheating and fire.

26) When you use the headphones, keep the volume at a moderate level. If you use the headphones continuously with high volume sound, it may cause hearing damage.

27) Do not look into the opening of the disc slot or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the laser beam. It may cause eye damage.

28) Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious personal injury and product malfunction.

29) This reminder is provided to call the cable TV system installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

CONDENSATION

Moisture will form in the operating section of the player if the player is brought from cool surroundings into a warm room or if the temperature of the room rises suddenly. When this happens, player's performance will be impaired.

To prevent this, let the player stand in its new surroundings for about an hour before switching it on, or make sure that the room temperature rises gradually.

Condensation may also form during the summer if the player is exposed to the breeze from an air conditioner. In such cases, change the location of the player.

HOW TO HANDLE THE LCD PANEL

• Do not press hard or jolt the LCD panel. It may cause the LCD panel glass to break and injury may occur.

• If the LCD panel is broken, make absolutely sure that you do not touch the liquid in the panel. This may cause skin inflammation.

If the liquid gets in your mouth, immediately gargle and consult with your doctor. Also, if the liquid gets in your eyes or touches your skin, consult with your doctor after rinsing for at least 15 minutes or longer in clean water.

A1-5

WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK

[ When removing the DVD Deck ]

Before removing Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector, the short circuit the position shown in Fig.

1 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.

[ When installing the DVD Deck ]

Remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD

MT PCB connector.

NOTE

•

Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF SERVICING”.

Use the Lead Free solder.

• Manual soldering conditions

• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20 o

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu

• When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the draw in equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the

Flux smoke away from it.

Pick Up PCB

Short circuit using a soldering iron.

Fig. 1

A1-6

DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY

Remove the Back Cabinet and Angle Deck. (Refer to item 1 of the DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)

Slide the Belt Loading toward the arrow direction by hand to release the lock. (Refer to Fig. 1)

Take out the Disc from the DVD Deck. Be careful not to scratch on the Disc.

DVD Deck

Belt Loading

Fig. 1

PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL

4 DIGIT PASSWORD CANCELLATION

If the stored 4 digit password in the Rating Level menu needs to be cancelled, please follow the steps below.

Turn Unit ON.

Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.

Check that “No disc” is displayed on the screen.

Press and hold the “STOP” button on the top panel.

Simultaneously press and hold the “7” key on the remote control unit.

Hold both keys for more than 2 seconds.

The On Screen Display message “PASSWORD CLEAR” will appear.

The 4 digit password has now been cleared.

A1-7

REMOTE CONTROL KEY CODE

NEC Format

Custom Code : 40-BF H, 44-BB H, 45-BA H, 45-BC H

No.

Key Name Custom Code Key Code

1 EJECT

2 TV/DVD

3 SLEEP

4 POWER

45 BA

45 BC

40 BF

5 1

6 2

7 3

8 4

9 5

10 6

11 7

12 8

40 BF

13 9

14 DISPLAY

15 0

16 / JUMP

17 SUBTITLE

18 CH UP

19 VOLUME +

20 AUDIO SELECT

21 INPUT/ZOOM

22 CH DOWN

23 VOLUME -

24 MUTE

25 PLAY MODE

26 DVD MENU

27 UP

40 BF

44 BB

40 BF

44 BB

40 BF

44 BB

28 LEFT

29 ENTER

30 RIGHT

31 DOWN

32 MENU/SETUP

33 EXIT/CANCEL

34 PAUSE

35 PLAY

36 STOP

37 CH RTN/|<<SKIP

38 <<REV

39 FF>>

44 BB

40 BF

44 BB

40 CLOSED CAPTION/SKIP>>| 40 BF

41 <|SLOW 45 BA

42 ANGLE

43 MARKER

44 BB

45 BA

44 BB

40 BF

44 BB

44 SLOW |>

45 TOP MENU

46 RETURN

47 REPEAT A-B

48 GAME

49 PICTURE SIZE

44 BB

40 BF

A1-8

G-1 TV

System

LCD

Color System

Speaker

Sound Output

G-2 DVD System

Color System

Disc

G-3 Tuning

System

G-4 Signal

Disc Diameter

Drive

Search speed

RGB Signal

Audio Signal

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

LCD Size / Visual Size

LCD Type

Number of Pixels

View Range Left/Right

Up/Down

Bright Dot

Zero Bright Dot Ratio

15.6 inch / 394.9mmV

Color TFT LCD

1366(H) x 768(V)

85/85 degree

80/80 degree

Position

Size

Impedance

Max

10%(Typical)

Fwd

Rev

Actual

Slow speed Fwd

Actual

Rev

Broadcasting System Analog

Digital

Tuner and

Receive CH

CH Coverage

System

Destination

Intermediate Digital

Frequency Analog Picture(FP)

Sound(FS)

FP-FS

Preset CH

Stereo/Dual TV Sound

Tuner Sound Muting

Video Signal Input Level

Output Level

S/N Ratio (Weighted)

Horizontal Resolution at DVD Mode

Actual

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level at DVD at TV

Digital Output Level

S/N Ratio at DVD (Weighted)

Harmonic Distortion

Frequency Response : at DVD at Video CD at SVCD at CD

---

NTSC

2 Speaker

Front

1.2 x 2.8 inch

8 ohm

1.5W + 1.5W

---

NTSC

DVD, CD-

DVD-R/RW (Video Format Only)

120 mm , 80 mm

DSM-2

4 step

2-45 times (DVD)

4-40 times (CD)

4 step

2-45 times (DVD)

4-40 times (CD)

1/7 -1/2 times

US System M

ATSC(8VSB)/QAM

1Tuner

US (W/CABLE)

2~69, 4A, A-5~A-1, A~I, J~W, W+1~W+84

44.00MHz

45.75MHz

41.25MHz

4.50MHz

US-Stereo

Yes

1 V p-p/75 ohm

-8.0dBm/50k ohm

0.5 V p-p/75 ohm

A2-1

G-5 Power

Power Source

Power Consumption

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-6

G-7

Regulation

Temperature

Protector

Stand by (at AC)

Energy Star

Per Year

Power Fuse

Safety Circuit

IC Protector(Micro Fuse)

Safety

Radiation

Laser

Operation

Storage

Space Around Unit

G-8 Operating Humidity

G-9 Clock and

Timer

Clock

Sleep Timer

On Timer

Off Timer

Game Timer

(Only Broadcasting data)

Max Time

Program

Wake Up Timer

Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode) more than at AC at DC

120V, 60Hz

35W at 120V 60Hz

0.8W at 120V 60Hz

Yes

-- kWh/Year

Yes

UL(UL6500_2nd)

FCC

DHHS

+5 o

C ~ +40 o

-20 o

C ~ +60 o

100 mm(4inch)

Less than 80% RH

120 Min

-- Min Sec

A2-2

G-10 Remote

Control

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Unit

Glow in Dark Remocon

Remocon Format

Format

Custom Code

Power Source Voltage(D.C)

UM size x pcs

Total Keys

Keys

Power

Eject

Sleep

TV/DVD

Jump / -

Display

Subtitle

Audio Select

Input Select / Zoom

Mute

CH Up

CH Down

Vol Up

Vol Down

Play Mode

DVD Menu

Down

Left

Right

Enter

Menu / Setup

Exit / Cancel

Game

Picture Size

Pause

Play

Stop

Skip+ / Closed Caption

Skip- / CH Return

Search+

Search-

Slow+

Slow-

Angle

Marker

Top Menu

Return

Closed Caption

Repeat A-B

Zoom/ Quick View

Freeze frame

Yes

RC-LT

Yes

TOSHIBA

40-BF h ,44-BB h ,45-BA h ,45-BC h

UM-4 x 2 pcs

49 Keys

Yes

A2-3

G-11 Features

Auto Shut Off

Auto Search

Power On Memory

Comb Filter

Game Position

Auto Setup(Language/CH Program)

Picture Setting(TV)

Picture Preference

Brightness , Contrast , Color

Tint

Sharpness

Color Temperature

DNR

Cable Clear

Picture Setting(PC)

Audio

Tuning

Label

HOR Position , VER Position

Phase, Clock

Red, Green, Blue

Auto Adjust

Backlight

MTS

Tone Control (Bass/Treble/Balance)

Stable Sound

Surround

BBE

SRS WOW (SRS 3D/Focus/Tru Bass)

Variable Audio Out

CH Program

Air/Cable

ADD/DELETE

CH Label

Video Label

Favorite CH

V-Chip

Type

RRT Setup

Lock Hotel Lock

Channel Lock

Video Lock

Panel Lock

Menu Language

Closed Caption

CC Advanced

Picture Size

HD Zoom

Picture Scroll

Film Mode

Aspect

Backlight

PFC(Power Factor circuit)

Freeze frame

PIP/POP

Direct Input Selection

Digital Out Dolby Digital

MPEG

PCM

DTS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Yes

3 -D

Yes

USA Type

Yes

English

French

Spanish

Yes

A2-4

Features

(DVD)

PC Monitor Input

HDMI Input

Component Input

Wall Mount

Video CD Playback

SVCD Playback

MP3 Playback

JPEG

WMA

Divx Playback

Digital Out

Down Mix Out

Closed Caption

Screen Saver

TV Screen

Audio DAC

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

VGA (640x480)

VGA (720x400)

WVGA (848x480)

SVGA (800x600)

XGA (1024x768)

WXGA (1280x768)

WXGA (1280x720)

WXGA (1360x768)

SXGA (1280x1024)

VGA (640×480)

720×480i (4:3)

720×480i (16:9)

720×480p (4:3)

720×480p (16:9)

720×576i (4:3)

720×576i (16:9)

720×576p (4:3)

720×576p (16:9)

1280×720p

1920×1080i

CEC (ORION Standard)

Deep Color xvYCC

720×480i (4:3)

720×480i (16:9)

720×480p (4:3)

720×480p (16:9)

720×576i (4:3)

720×576i (16:9)

720×576p (4:3)

720×576p (16:9)

1280×720p

1920×1080i

Size W x H(mm)

Screw Size

DMF Support

(Dolby Digital)

(MPEG)

(PCM)

(DTS)

(Dolby Digital)

(DTS)

4:3 (Letter Box, Pan Scan)

16:9 (Wide)

Yes

Yes (60Hz)

Yes

192kHz / 24bit

A2-5

G-12 Accessories

Owner's Manual Language w/Guarantee Card

Remote Control Unit

Rod Antenna

Poles

Terminal

Loop Antenna

Terminal

U/V Mixer

DC Car Cord (Center+)

Guarantee Card

Warning Sheet

Circuit Diagram

Antenna Change Plug

Service Facility List

Important Safeguard

Dew/AHC Caution Sheet

Quick Set-up Sheet(Spanish)

Battery

AC Adapter

AC Cord (for AC Adapter)

UM size x pcs

OEM Brand

AC Cord

AV Cord (2Pin-1Pin)

Registration Card (NDL Card)

300 to 75ohm Antenna Adapter

Sheet Information (Return)

Sheet Information (HDMI)

Cleaning Cloth

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

English

Yes

UM-4 x 2 pcs

Yes

Yes(USA version)

A2-6

G-13 Interface

G-14 Set Size

G-15 Weight

Switch

Indicator

Top

Rear

Terminals Rear

Power (Tact)

Channel Up/Menu Up/Play

Channel Down/Menu Down/Stop

Volume Up/Menu >

Volume Down/Menu <

Play

Eject

Skip+, Search+

Skip-, Search-

Still/Pause

Stop

Main Power SW

Input Select/Enter

Main Power SW

Power/Stand-By

Power Wake Up

On Timer

Video Input 1

Audio Input 1

S - Input 1

Video Input 2

Audio Input 2

S - Input 2

Video Output

Audio Output

Component Input 1

Analog Audio

Component Input 2

Analog Audio

HDMI Input 1

Analog Audio

HDMI Input 2

Analog Audio

Sub Woofer Out

PC Monitor Input

Analog Audio

Digital Audio Output

DC Jack (Center +)

VHF/UHF Antenna Input

Video Input 3

Audio Input 3

S - Input 3

Other Terminal

AC Inlet

Approx. W x D x H (mm) w/o Handle, Stand Approx. W x D x H (mm)

Net (Approx.)

Net w/o Handle, Stand (Approx.)

Gross (Approx.)

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Yes

No (CH+ Alternative)

Yes

No (CH- Alternative)

Yes

Yes (Blue / Red)

RCA x 1

RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)

Yes

RCA x 3

RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)

Coaxial

F Type

Headphone

Yes

402.0 x 140.1 x 320.0

402.0 x 64.0 x 289.0

3.5kg

(7.7 lbs)

3.3kg (7.3 lbs)

5.0kg

(11.0 lbs)

A2-7

G-16 Carton

G-17 Material

G-18 Environment

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Master Carton

Content

Material

Dimensions W x D x H(mm)

Description of Origin

Gift Box Material

W/Color Photo Label

W/Handle

Dimensions W x D x H(mm)

Description of Origin

Drop Test

Height (cm)

Container Stuffing (40' container) w/Pallet w/Wrapping

Cabinet Front

Rear

PCB

Jack Panel

Non-Halogen Demand

Eyelet Demand

Environmental standard requirement

Pb-free

Measures for Whisker

--- Sets

--- / ---

---

Double/Full Color

Yes

474 x404 x 210

Yes

Natural Dropping At 2 Corner / 2 Edges / 3 Surfaces

1551 Sets/40' container

PC+ABS 94V0 NON-HALOGEN

PS 94V0 NON-DECABROM

Yes

Green procurement of ORION

Phase3(Phase3A)

Yes

A2-8

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS

AND P.C. BOARDS

CAUTION

Be careful not to remove the FFC cable forcibly, because the FFC cable may be damaged.

1-3: POWER PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-3)

Remove the 2 screws (1).

Remove the Sheet Pc-1 in the direction of arrow (A).

Remove the Angle Lcd-R in the direction of arrow (B).

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP501, CP2201 and CP8101).

Remove the 5 screws (2).

Remove the Power PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

1-1: STAND ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 1-1)

Remove the 2 screws (1).

Remove the Stand Ass'y in the direction of arrow (A).

Unlock the support (2).

Remove the Cover Back in the direction of arrow (B).

Remove the 6 screws (3).

(3)

(1)

(3)

Stand Ass'y

(1)

Sheet Pc-1

(A)

Angle Lcd-R

(2)

(B)

Power PCB

(2)

CP8101

CP501

(C)

(3)

(A)

(3)

(2)

(B)

Support

Cover Back

CP2201

Fig. 1-3

1-2: FRONT CABINET ASS'Y, LCD PANEL AND

REMOCON PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-2)

Remove the Front Cabinet Ass'y in the direction of arrow (A).

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CD7005 and CP2804).

Remove the LCD PANEL in the direction of arrow (B).

Disconnect the following connector: (CP7601).

Unlock the support (1).

Remove the Remocon PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

LCD Panel

(A)

(3)

Front Cabinet Ass'y

Fig. 1-1

1-4: DIGITAL PCB AND OPERATION PCB

(Refer to Fig. 1-4)

Remove the 2 screws (1).

Remove the Sheet Pc-2 in the direction of arrow (A).

Remove the Angle Lcd-L in the direction of arrow (B).

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP3001 and CP3002).

Remove the 4 screws (2).

Remove the Digital PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

Remove the Shield Digital in the direction of arrow (D).

Remove the 2 screws (3).

Remove the Operation PCB in the direction of arrow (E).

(1)

Sheet Pc-2

Operation PCB

(E)

CP3001

CP3002

(2)

(A)

(2)

(3)

(B)

(C)

(D)

Angle Lcd-L

(2)

Digital PCB

Shield Digital

CD7005

Remocon PCB

(B)

(1)

(C)

CP7601

Support

Fig. 1-4

CP2804

Fig. 1-2

B1-1

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1-5: DVD DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-5)

Short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1-5 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.

Remove the 3 screws (1).

Remove the DVD Deck in the direction of arrow (A).

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP2301, CP2302 and CP2303).

Remove the support (2).

Remove the Cover DVD in the direction of arrow (B).

Remove the 2 screws (3).

Remove the Angle Mpeg in the direction of arrow (C).

Remove the 4 screws (4).

10.

Remove the DVD MT PCB in the direction of arrow (D).

Support

Angle Mpeg

(2)

(B)

(1)

Cover DVD

(1)

CP2303

CP2301

CP2302

(D)

Pick Up PCB

DVD MT PCB

(4)

(4) (4)

(C)

(1)

DVD Deck

Short circuit using a soldering iron.

(3)

(A) (3)

Fig. 1-5

NOTE

Before your operation, please read "PREPARATION OF

SERVICING"

Use the Lead Free solder.

Manual soldering conditions

• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20 o

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu

When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the drawing equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke away from it.

When installing the DVD Deck, remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up

PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.

B1-2

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

2. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS

NOTE

1. Disassemble only the DVD DECK PARTS parts listed here. Minute adjustments are needed if the disassembly is done. If the repair is needed except listed parts, replace the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.

2-1: TRAVERSE ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-1-A)

Remove the 3 screws (1).

Unlock the 2 supports (2).

Remove the Insulator (R) from the Loader Sub Ass'y.

Remove the Traverse Ass'y.

Check Hook

Loader Sub Ass'y

Traverse Ass'y

(2)

Insulator (R)

Check Hook

Loader Ass'y (Top Side)

Fig. 2-1-D

2-2: SWITCH PCB ASS'Y/GEAR MIDDLE/GEAR FEED/RACK

FEED ASS'Y/FEED MOTOR (Refer to Fig. 2-2-A)

Remove the Insulator (F).

Remove the Insulator (R).

Unlock the support (1).

Remove the Gear Middle.

Remove the screw (2).

Remove the Rack Feed Ass'y.

Remove the screw (3).

Remove the Switch PCB Ass'y.

Remove the screw (4).

10.

Remove the Gear Feed.

11.

Remove the 2 screws (5).

12.

Remove the Feed Motor.

13.

Remove the Gear Motor.

(1)

• Screw Torque: 2.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm

Fig. 2-1-A

NOTE

1. In case of the Traverse Ass'y installation, hook the wire on the Loader Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-1-B to Fig. 2-1-C.

Loader Ass'y (Bottom Side)

Traverse Ass'y

Gear Motor

Insulator (F)

Feed Motor

Insulator (R)

Check Lock

Check Hook

80 ± 5mm

Check Lock

Fig. 2-1-B

Insulator (F)

Rack Feed Ass'y

(2)

(1)

(5)

Gear Feed

(4)

Gear Middle

Switch PCB Ass'y

(3)

• Screw Torque: 1.3 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 2)

• Screw Torque: 3.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 3)

• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 4, 5)

Fig. 2-2-A

Loader Ass'y

Check Hook

Fig. 2-1-C

B2-1

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

NOTE

When installing the Rack Feed Ass'y, push both ends to align the teeth as shown Fig. 2-2-B. Then install it.

In case of the Gear Motor installation, check if the value of the Fig. 2-2-C is correct.

When installing the wire of the Switch PCB Ass'y, install it correctly as Fig. 2-2-D.

Manual soldering conditions

• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20 o

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu

After the assembly of the Traverse Ass'y, hook the wire on the Traverse Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-2-E.

Rack Feed Ass'y

Check Hook

Traverse Ass'y

Check Hook

• Loosen the wire in the direction of the arrow.

Push

[OK] [NG]

Push

Fig. 2-2-B

Fig. 2-2-E

2-3: FFC WIRE HANDLING

When installing the FFC, fold it correctly and install it as shown from Fig. 2-3-A to Fig. 2-3-B.

NOTE

Do not make the folding lines except the specified positions for the FFC.

[ 24 pin FFC ]

To Pick Up PCB

Fold it by 90û

Printing Surface

20 ± 1mm

30 ± 1mm

Gear Motor

Feed Motor

8.0 ± 0.2mm

Fig. 2-3-A

[ 6 pin FFC ]

40 ± 1mm

Safety surface for pressing of the insert.

Fig. 2-2-C

Switch PCB Ass'y

~ FEED MOTOR ~

WHITE (4)

BROWN (3)

• Install wire from (1) to (4) in order.

Fold

Fig. 2-3-B

~ SPINDLE MOTOR ~

YELLOW (2)

GREEN (1)

Fig. 2-2-D

B2-2

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

3. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF

FLAT PACKAGE IC

REMOVAL

Put Masking Tape (cotton tape) around the Flat Package

IC to protect other parts from any damage.

(Refer to Fig. 3-1.)

NOTE

Masking is carried out on all the parts located within

10 mm distance from IC leads.

When IC starts moving back and forth easily after desoldering completely, pickup the corner of the IC using tweezers and remove the IC by moving with the IC desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-3.)

NOTE

Some ICs on the PCB are affixed with glue, so be careful not to break or damage the foil of each IC leads or solder lands under the IC when removing it.

Blower type IC desoldering machine

Masking Tape

(Cotton Tape)

Tweezers

Fig. 3-1

Heat the IC leads using a blower type IC desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-2.)

NOTE

Do not rotate or move the IC back and forth , until IC can move back and forth easily after desoldering the leads completely.

Blower type IC desoldering machine

Fig. 3-3

Peel off the Masking Tape.

Absorb the solder left on the pattern using the Braided

Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-4.)

NOTE

Do not move the Braided Shield Wire in the vertical direction towards the IC pattern.

Braided Shield Wire

Soldering Iron

IC pattern Fig. 3-4

Fig. 3-2

B3-1

INSTALLATION

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

When bridge-soldering between terminals and/or the soldering amount are not enough, resolder using a Thintip Soldering Iron. (Refer to Fig. 3-8.)

Take care of the polarity of new IC and then install the new IC fitting on the printed circuit pattern. Then solder each lead on the diagonal positions of IC temporarily.

(Refer to Fig. 3-5.)

Thin-tip Soldering Iron

Soldering Iron

Solder temporarily

Fig. 3-5

Supply the solder from the upper position of IC leads sliding to the lower position of the IC leads.

(Refer to Fig. 3-6.)

Fig. 3-8

Finally, confirm the soldering status on four sides of the

IC using a magnifying glass.

Confirm that no abnormality is found on the soldering position and installation position of the parts around the

IC. If some abnormality is found, correct by resoldering.

NOTE

When the IC leads are bent during soldering and/or repairing, do not repair the bending of leads. If the bending of leads are repaired, the pattern may be damaged. So, always be sure to replace the IC in this case.

Solder Soldering Iron

Supply soldering from upper position to lower position

Fig. 3-6

Absorb the solder left on the lead using the Braided

Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-7.)

NOTE

Do not absorb the solder to excess.

Soldering Iron

Braided Shield Wire

Fig. 3-7

B3-2

SERVICE MODE LIST

This unit is provided with the following SERVICE MODES so you can repair, examine and adjust easily.

To enter to the SERVICE MODE function, press and hold both buttons simultaneously on the main unit and on the remote control for more than a the standard time in the appropriate condition. (See below chart.)

Set

Condition

Set Key

Remocon

Key

Standard

Time

Operations

TV mode

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

0 2 sec.

Releasing of V-CHIP PASSWORD.

TV mode

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

1 2 sec.

Initialization of factory TV data.

NOTE: If you set factory initialization, the memories are reset such as the channel setting, and the POWER ON total hours.

DVD mode

(No disc)

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

4 2 sec.

Initialization of factory DVD data.

DVD mode

(No disc)

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

ALL mode

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

ALL mode

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

ALL mode

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

STOP

2 sec.

DVD Write mode.

Refer to the "RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE".

POWER ON total hours are displayed on the screen.

Can be checked of the INITIAL DATA of MEMORY IC.

Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".

Check of the SUM DATA and MICON VERSION on the screen.

Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".

Display of the Adjustment MENU on the screen.

Refer to the "ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT" (On-Screen Display

Adjustment).

V D

Refer to the "RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE".

DVD mode

(No disc)

DVD mode

(No disc)

STOP

7 2 sec.

Releasing of PARENTAL LOCK.

Refer to the "PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL".

C-1

JG176 Up-Date Disc

SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS

Ref. No.

JG176

Part No.

APJG176144

Parts Name

Up-Date Disc

Remarks

Up-Date of the Firmware

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

Confirm that the "No Disc" will be appeared on the screen.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (5) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

Press VOL. UP/DOWN button on the unit to check if all the keys on the unit do not function.

NOTE: To check if DVD Write mode is set.

When inserting Up-Date Disc at Non DVD Write mode, the read error will happen.

Insert the Up-Date Disc. (Refer to SERVICING FIXTURE AND TOOLS)

Automatic read will start and "Firmware upgrade Please Wait" will be displayed on the screen.

At this time, the horizontal noise lines may appear. But no problem.

NOTE: Do not turn off the unit on the way or operate the keys on the unit and remocon.

Up-Date error will happen and can not be done with the Up-Date of Up-Date Disc.

After the Up-Date, Logo screen will appear.

Unplug the AC cord, then plug it in.

After the write, set to the initializing of shipping.

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

10.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (4) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

The "INITIALIZE 5 ---> COMPLETE" will appear on the screen.

11.

Then unplug the AC cord, and plug it in.

CHECK FOR THE FIRMWARE VERSION

12.

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

13.

Press both Channel button (1) on the remote control and the STOP button on the set for more than 2 seconds.

Firmware version will be displayed on the top left of the screen.

F/W Ver. ADLJD8718A

Initialize: Complete

Laser drive time

DVD LD: 0Hour

CD LD : 0Hour

A D L J D 8 7 1 8 A

Fixed

When the changed version displays, the Re-write will be completed.

14.

Turn off the power

Released times on the same date

Release date (Example: 2008.07.18)

A = October

B = November

C = December

C-2

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC

CONFIRMATION OF CHECK SUM, POWER ON TOTAL HOURS AND MICON VERSION

Initial total of MEMORY IC, POWER ON total hours and MICON VERSIONcan be checked on the screen. Total hours are displayed in 16 system of notation.

NOTE: If you set a factory initialization, the total hours is reset to "0".

Please refer to "CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA" when SUM DATA is not corresponding.

Turn on the POWER, and set to the ALL mode.

Set the VOLUME to minimum.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (8) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

After the confirmation of each check sum, turn off the power.

NOTE: The each item value might be different according to each set.

Sub Micon check version

Main Micon check version

EEPROM check version

Parameter

CHECK SUM: 403F

LCD PWR ON: 0000

SUB: DA0E783212

DTV: CA01I85291

EEPROM: J51T01PM00

Picture: pic_CA01I0003

Initial setting data check sum.

POWER ON total hours.

= (16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value)

+ (16 x 16 x hundreds digit value)

+ (16 x tens digit value)

+ (ones digit value)

FIG. 1

CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA

If a service repair is undertaken where it has been required to change the MEMORY IC, the following steps should be taken to ensure correct data settings while making reference to INITIAL SETTING TABLE (Attached "INITIAL DATA").

Turn on the POWER, and set to the ALL mode.

Set the VOLUME to minimum.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (6) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

ADDRESS and DATA should appear as FIG 2.

NOTE: No need to set data other position than 7200~79FF.

ADDRESS DATA

INIT : 0001 0099

SUB: DA0E783212

DTV: CA01I85291

EEPROM: J51T01PM00

FIG. 2

ADDRESS is now selected and should "blink". Using the UP/DOWN buton on the remote, step through the ADDRESS until required ADDRESS to be changed is reached.

Press LEFT/RIGHT button to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will "blink".

Again, step through the DATA using UP/DOWN button until required DATA value has been selected.

Pressing LEFT/RIGHT button will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.

Repeat steps 4 to 6 until all data has been checked.

When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.

After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.

10.

Turn on the Power.

11.

Set the VOLUME to minimum.

12.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (1) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

13.

After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.

The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.

C-3

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

1. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

Read and perform these adjustments when repairing the circuits or replacing electrical parts or PCB assemblies.

CAUTION

• Use an isolation transformer when performing any service on this chassis.

• When removing a PCB or related component, after unfastening or changing a wire, be sure to put the wire back in its original position.

• When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink, apply silicon grease on the contact section of the heat sink. Before applying new silicon grease, remove all the old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause damages to the IC and Transistor).

Prepare the following measurement tools for electrical adjustments.

1. Pattern Generator

NO.

FUNCTION

R DRIVE(N)

R CUT OFF(N)

G DRIVE(N)

G CUT OFF(N)

B DRIVE(N)

B CUT OFF(N)

R DRIVE(C)

R CUT OFF(C)

G DRIVE(C)

G CUT OFF(C)

B DRIVE(C)

B CUT OFF(C)

R DRIVE(W)

R CUT OFF(W)

G DRIVE(W)

G CUT OFF(W)

B DRIVE(W)

B CUT OFF(W)

BAK LIGHT CENT

BAK LIGHT MAX

On-Screen Display Adjustment

Set the VOLUME to minimum.

Press the VOL. DOWN button on the set and the channel button (9) on the remote control for more than

2 seconds to display adjustment mode on the screen as shown in Fig. 1-1.

Function

03 R DRIVE (N)

FULL

480i

Step No.

Fig. 1-1

Use the CH. UP/DOWN button or Channel button (0-9) on the remote control to select the options shown in

Fig. 1-2.

Press the MENU SETUP button on the remote control to end the adjustments.

To display the adjustment screen for TV, AV, GAME,

COMPONENT and DVD mode, press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control.

Receive the DIGITAL broadcasting.

To display the adjustment screen for DTV mode, select the digital channel.

Press the VOL.DOWN button on the set and the channel

(9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

NO.

FUNCTION

BAK LIGHT MIN

BRIGHTNESS CENT

BRIGHTNESS MAX

BRIGHTNESS MIN

TINT

SHARP H1 MAX

SHARP H1 MIN

SHARP H2 MAX

SHARP H2 MIN

SHARP V1 MAX

SHARP V1 MIN

CONTRAST CENTER

CONTRAST MAX

CONTRAST MIN

COLOR CENTER

COLOR MAX

COLOR MIN

CONTRAST 40

Fig. 1-2

2. BASIC ADJUSTMENTS

2-1: WHITE BALANCE

Place the set in Aging Test for more than 20 minutes.

Receive the gray scale pattern from the Pattern

Generator.

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to set to the AV mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-2 and press the channel button (03) on the remote control to select "R DRIVE(N)".

Press the CH. UP/DOWN button on the remote control to select the "R DRIVE (N)", "R CUT OFF (N)",

"B DRIVE (N)", "B CUT OFF (N)", "R DRIVE (C)",

"R CUT OFF (C)", "B DRIVE (C)", "B CUT OFF (C)",

"R DRIVE (W)","R CUT OFF (W), "B DRIVE (W)" or

"B CUTOFF(W)".

Adjust the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control to whiten the R DRIVE (N), R CUT OFF (N),

B DRIVE (N), B CUT OFF (N), R DRIVE (C),

R CUT OFF (C), B DRIVE (C), B CUT OFF (C),

R DRIVE (W) ,R CUT OFF (W), B DRIVE (W) and

B CUTOFF(W) at each step tone sections equally.

Perform the above adjustments 6 and 7 until the white color is achieved.

D-1

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

2-2: BRIGHT CENT

Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (32) on the remote control to select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the brightness cent step No. becomes "120".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to set to the AV mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (32) on the remote control to

10.

select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

11.

12.

the brightness cent step No. becomes "120".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)

13.

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to set to the AV(Y/C) mode. Then perform the above adjustments 8~11.

14.

15.

Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

16.

set to the COMPONENT mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

17.

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (32) on the remote control to

18.

select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control

19.

20.

until the brightness cent step No. becomes "120".

Check if the picture is normal.

Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

21.

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above adjustments 16~19.

22.

23.

Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

24.

25.

set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above adjustments 16~19.

Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)

Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to the DVD mode.

26.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

27.

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (32) on the remote control to select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".

28.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

29.

the brightness cent step No. becomes "110".

Check if the picture is normal.

D-2

2-3: CONTRAST MAX

Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (43) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the contrast max step No. becomes "151".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to set to the AV mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (43) on the remote control to

10.

select "CONTRAST MAX".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

11.

12.

the contrast max step No. becomes "149".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)

13.

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

14.

set to the AV(Y/C) mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

15.

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (43) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX".

16.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

17.

the contrast max step No. becomes "156".

Check if the picture is normal.

18.

19.

Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

20.

set to the COMPONENT mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

21.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (43) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX".

22.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the contrast max step No. becomes "126".

23.

24.

Check if the picture is normal.

Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

25.

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above adjustments 20~23.

26.

27.

Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above adjustments 20~23.

28.

Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)

29.

Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to

30.

the DVD mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

31.

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (43) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX".

32.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

33.

the contrast max step No. becomes "113".

Check if the picture is normal.

2-4: CONTRAST CENTER

Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (42) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST CENTER".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the contrast cent step No. becomes "112".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to set to the AV mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (42) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST CENTER".

10.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

11.

12.

13.

the contrast cent step No. becomes "111".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to set to the AV(Y/C) mode.

14.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

15.

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (42) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST CENTER".

16.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

17.

18.

19.

the contrast cent step No. becomes "116".

Check if the picture is normal.

Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

20.

set to the COMPONENT mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

21.

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (42) on the remote control to

22.

select "CONTRAST CENTER".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control

23.

24.

until the contrast cent step No. becomes "94".

Check if the picture is normal.

Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

25.

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above adjustments 19~23.

26.

27.

Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

28.

29.

set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above adjustments 19~23.

Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)

Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to the DVD mode.

30.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

31.

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (42) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST CENTER".

32.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

33.

the contrast cent step No. becomes "111".

Check if the picture is normal.

D-3

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

2-5: CONTRAST 40

Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (50) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST 40".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the contrast 40 step No. becomes "142".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to set to the AV mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (50) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST 40".

10.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

11.

12.

13.

the contrast 40 step No. becomes "141".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to set to the AV(Y/C) mode.

14.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

15.

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (50) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST 40".

16.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

17.

18.

19.

the contrast 40 step No. becomes "148".

Check if the picture is normal.

Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

20.

set to the COMPONENT mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

21.

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (50) on the remote control to

22.

select "CONTRAST 40".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control

23.

24.

until the contrast 40 step No. becomes "120".

Check if the picture is normal.

Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

25.

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above adjustments 20~23.

26.

27.

Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

28.

29.

set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above adjustments 20~23.

Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)

Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to the DVD mode.

30.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

31.

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (50) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST 40".

32.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

33.

the contrast 40 step No. becomes "155".

Check if the picture is normal.

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

2-6: Confirmation of Fixed Value (Step No.)

Please check if the fixed values of each of the adjustment item is set correctly referring below. (TV/AV/GAME/COMPONENT/DVD/DTV)

NO.

FUNCTION

R.DRIVE (N)

R.CUTOFF (N)

G DRIVE (N)

G CUTOFF (N)

B DRIVE (N)

B CUTOFF (N)

R.DRIVE (C)

R CUTOFF (C)

G DRIVE (C)

G CUTOFF (C)

B DRIVE (C)

B CUTOFF (C)

R.DRIVE (W)

R CUTOFF (W)

G DRIVE (W)

G CUTOFF (W)

B RRIVE (W)

B CUTOFF (W)

BAK LIGHT CENT

BAK LIGHT MAX

BAK LIGHT MIN

BRIGHT CENT

BRIGHT MAX

BRIGHT MIN

TINT

SHARP H1 MAX

SHARP H1 MIN

SHARP H2 MAX

SHARP H2 MIN

SHARP V1 MAX

SHARP V1 MIN

CONT CENTER

CONT MAX

CONT MIN

COLOR CENT

COLOR MAX

COLOR MIN

CONT 40

Step No.

180

128

511

120

130

255

CVBS

Step No.

Y/C

Step No.

180

122

511

120

140

255

180

122

511

120

140

255

GAME

Step No.

180

122

511

120

140

255

480i

Step No.

180

121

511

120

170

255

COMPONENT

480p

Step No.

720p

Step No.

180

122

511

120

175

255

180

129

511

120

186

255

NOTE:

For the step no. with * mark, please adjust it according to the situation of the set.

1080i

Step No.

180

129

511

120

186

255

DVD

Step No.

180

122

511

110

140

255

480i

Step No.

180

115

511

128

140

255

480p

Step No.

DTV

720p

Step No.

180

118

511

128

140

255

180

115

511

128

140

255

1080i

Step No.

180

122

511

128

140

255

D-4

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

3. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE (WIRING CONNECTION)

CD7005

LCD PANEL

DVD MT PCB

DVD DECK

CD502

CP501

CP2301

CP8502

CP2302

CP2303

CD2001

CP2201

CD2301

OPERATION PCB

OS7601

CP7601

REMOCON PCB

J8101

J501

POWER PCB

SPEAKER

CD301

CP4301

CP3002

CP3001

CP2804

J4301

D-5

DIGITAL PCB

TU5801

CD6203

(LCD SECTION)

POWER DOES NOT TURN ON

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Is F501 broken?

Yes

Is there voltage at pin

6 of IC501 21V?

Yes

Is R510 broken?

Change POWER PCB.

Yes

Change F501.

Check IC501 and peripheral circuit.

Change R510.

E-1

THE PICTURE APPEARS,

BUT THE AUDIO DOES NOT

APPEARS. (AT RF MODE)

Is CD301 connected?

Yes

Is there signal at pins

1 and 4 of CD301?

Yes

Is there signal at pins

2 and 4 of IC301?

Yes

Is there signal at pins

AA3 and AA4 of IC2801?

Yes

Is there signal at pins 1 and 2 of IC6551?

Yes

Is there signal at pin 6 of IC6552, IC6553?

Yes

Is there signal at pin

5 of TU5801?

Yes

Change TU5801.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Connect CD301.

Change SP301 and SP302.

Check IC301 and peripheral circuit.

Check Connection of CP4301.

Check IC6551 and peripheral circuit.

Check IC6552, IC6553 and peripheral circuit.

Check IC5801 and peripheral circuit.

E-2

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

THE PICTURE DOES NOT

APPEAR

Does backlight shine?

Yes

Is CD7005 connected ?

Yes

Is the signal pin 16 and 18 of IC7001 ?

Yes

Is the voltage at pin

20 of IC7001 12V ?

Yes

Connected CD7005

Check IC7001 and peripheral circuit.

Check F7001.

Is CD2804 connected?

Yes

Is there voltage at pins 1,2,3

No and 16,17 of CP2804 5V?

Yes

Is there signal at pins

7,9,10,12,13,22,23,25,26 and 28 of CP2804?

Yes

Change DIGITAL PCB.

Connected CD2804.

Check Q3009 and peripheral circuit.

E-3

Change V2801(PANEL).

THE COLOR DOES NOT

APPEAR

Is setting of color normal?

Yes

Is the color signal received?

Yes

Is there color signal at IC2801?

Yes

Change DIGITAL PCB.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Adjust the color.

Receive the color signal.

Check IC2801 and peripheral circuit.

E-4

(DVD SECTION)

DOES NOT DISPLAY DVD

PICTURE

Yes

Does this display logo picture?

Is there signal at pins 149 and 151 of IC4001?

Yes

Does IC4001 gets

P.CON+3.3V and

P.CON+1.8V?

Check P.CON+3.3V and

P.CON+1.8V line.

Yes

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Check the disc.

Check pins 8 and 10 of

CP8501 and peripheral circuit.

Change IC4001.

E-5

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DISC DOES NOT EJECT

Does OSD appear on the screen?

Yes

Is remote key set effectively?

Yes

Check pins 138 and 139 of IC4001 and peripheral circuit.

Does this eject disc at change DVD DECK?

Yes

Change DVD DECK.

Is there signal at pins 4 and 5 of CP2302?

Yes

Is there signal at pins 1 and 2 of CP2302?

Yes

Change IC4001.

Check IC4001 and peripheral circuit.

Change IC2301.

E-6

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DOES NOT PLAY DVD

Does this display

"INCORRECT DISC"?

Yes

Does CD2001 connect with CP2301 correctly?

Yes

Connect CD2301.

Change DVD DECK.

Is the voltage between

JG017 and JG018 less than 3.3V?

Yes

Does this display reading mark?

Yes

Does disc rotate?

Yes

Change IC4001.

Change DVD DECK.

E-7

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DOES NOT PLAY CD

Does this display

"INCORRECT DISC"?

Yes

Does CD2001 connect with CP2301 correctly?

Yes

Connect CD2301.

Change DVD DECK.

Is the voltage between

JG019 and JG018 less than 3.3V?

Yes

Does this display reading mark?

Yes

Does disc rotate?

Yes

Change IC4001.

Change DVD DECK.

E-8

NO SOUND DVD/CD ANALOG

AUDIO

Is there signal at pins

113, 114, 115 and

116 of IC4001?

Yes

Is there signal at pins 1 and 7 of IC8501?

Yes

Does CD8501 connected?

Yes

Change MAIN PCB.

NO SOUND DVD/CD DIGITAL

AUDIO

Is there signal at pin1 of CP8501?

Yes

Is there signal at pin

122 of IC4001?

Change IC4001.

Yes

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Change IC4001.

Check pins 1 and 7 of IC8501 and peripheral circuit.

Connected CD8501.

Change MAIN PCB.

Check line circuit IC4001 to CP8501.

E-9

F-1

DVD BLOCK DIAGRAM

DVD LOADER

DSM2

MD_DVD, MD_CD

RF, A, B, C, D, E, F

OPU

SPINDLE/

STEPING/

SLED

MOTOR

DVD_CD, DVD_LD, CD_LD

TR+/-, FO+/-,

MOT_LD+/-,

MOT_SLED+/-

MOT_SPDL+/-

Motor Drive

IC2301

LA6565VR-TLM-E

HOME, TIN_SW, TOUT_SW

SPINDLE/SLED/

FOCUS/TRACK_PWM,

TRAY_CLOSE/OPEN

SPDL_SENS+/-

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

IC4001

ZR36966ELCG-D-G

HA0~A19,

HD0~D15,

MEMCS0, RD, WR

APWM_L+/-,

APWM_R+/-

FLASH 16M

IC4007

SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

SD_A0~A11

SD_D0~D15

RAMDQM, CLK, CKE, WE#,

CAS#, CS0#, CS1#, RAS#

SD_BA0

64M SDRAM

IC4005

M12L64164A-7TG

AUDIO AMP

IC8501

NJM4565M(TE1)

DUPRD1

DUPTD1

TIN_SW

SPDIF

DAC_VIDEO_C/D

DAC_VIDEO_A

RESET

SYS_MUTE

LCD BLOCK

START_SW

SPDIF-134

C_VIDEO

Y_VIDEO

DVD RESET

ZERO

DVD_AUDIO_L

DVD_AUDIO_R

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD_A_OUT_R

F-2

F-3

AC IN

CD501

J501

F501

L501

D505

POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM

D510

D518

C502

TRANSFORMER

T501

3 11

D515

D523

Q501

POWER CONTROL IC

IC501 FA5531P-A2

1 ZCD VH

2 FB

Vcc

GND

OUT 5

FEED BACK

IC505

PS2561AL1-1-V(W)

REGULATOR

IC502 KIA431A-AT

3 1

DC-DC CONVERTER

IC503

LA5797M-TE-L-E

1 7

Q505

SOUND AMP

IC301

LA42052-E

CP501__3,13. AT+12V

CP501__4,5,14.

CP501__8.P.CON+32V

CP501__18. POWER FAIL

CP501__12.POWER_ON_H

CP501__1.FILTER_MUTE

CP501__10.INVERTER_H

CP501__9.LIGHT_CTL

T7001

CD7005__14.HV

CD7005__7.LV

CD7005__8.LV

CD7005__1.HV

INVERTER

CONTROLLER

IC7001

BD9882FV-E2

DRIVE

Q7005

DRIVE

Q7004

DRIVE

Q7003

FEED_BACK

IC7002 LM2902DR

F-4

F-5

CP3001

1 FILTER MUTE

8 TUNER+30V

3 AT+12V

AT+5.8V

9 LIGHT_CTL

10 INVERTER_H

18 POWER FAIL

KEY_B

KEY_A

POWER(DIGITAL PCB) BLOCK DIAGRAM

5.0V REGULATOR

IC3007

BD7820FP-E2

3.3V REGULATOR

IC3009

S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG

AT3.3V

5.0V

SUB MICON

IC6202

R5F21124FP

EEPROM

IC2805

M24256-BWMN6TP

DIGITAL TUNER

TU5801

ENG36E18KRF

BTSC DEMODULATOR

IC5801

AN5832SA-E1V

AUDIO ADC

IC6551

AK5358A

VDD CORE 1V

IC3001

BD9130NV

SCALER IC

IC2801

R8J66954BG

VDD CORE

IC3002

AL1015

3.3V

FLASH IC

IC2804

EN29LV320AB-70TCP

LCD+B SW

Q3009

TPC6108(TE85L,F,M)

AUDIO Lch SW

IC6552

MM1501XNRE

AUDIO Rch SW

IC6553

MM1501XNRE

LCD PANEL

V2801

M156B1-L02

AUDIO Lch SW

IC6557

NJM2534V(TE2)

1.8V REGULATOR

IC3003

PQ035ZN1HZPH

1.8V

AUDIO Rch SW

IC6558

NJM2534V(TE2)

DDR SDRAM

IC2802

HYB18TC256160BF-3S

F-6

F-7

SIGNAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

HEADPHONE JACK

J301

PJ-364H

COMPONENT_VIDEO_IN

J8102

RCA-341H(NI)-09

COMPONENT Y

COMPONENT U

COMPONENT V

CVBS _AV_IN

J8104

RCA-341H(2)NI-06

AV 1 CVBS

AV1_A_IN_L

AV1_A_IN_R

COMPONENT AUDIO IN

J8103

RCA-228H(3)NI-02

YUV AUDIO_L

YUV AUDIO_R

AUDIO Lch SW IC

IC6557

NJM2534V(TE2)

AUDIO Rch SW IC

IC6558

NJM2534V(TE2)

TUNER

TU5801

ENG36E18KRF

SIF

DIGITAL RF (IF)

BTSC DEMODULATOR IC

IC5801

AN5832SA -E1V

TUNER AUDIO R

TUNER AUDIO L

ANALOG RF(CVBS)

S-VIDEO-IN

J8101

DIN-417HA-01

DVD CP3002

19 RX

7 TX

14 DVD_A_OUT_R

15 DVD_A_OUT_L

1 SPDIF-134

16 [V]Y_VIDEO

17 [U]C_VIDEO

6 START_SW

4 DVD_RESET

2 ZERO

AV1_Y

AV1_C

SPDIF_OUT

COAXIAL

J4301

RCA-101HT(OR)

AUDIO Lch SW IC

IC6552

MM1501XNRE

AUDIO L

AUDIO ADC IC

IC6551

AK5358A

AUDIO DATA

AUDIO Rch SW IC

IC6553

MM1501XNRE

AUDIO R

Y SW

IC6554

MM1501XNRE

C SW

IC6555

MM1501XNRE

SW_C_IN

SW_Y_IN

DIGITAL_A_SW

IC6556

TC7PA53FU(T5L,FT)

SPDIF

SUB MICON

IC6202

R5F21124FP

SCALER IC

IC2801

R8J66954BG

AUDIO L/R

SPEAKER L/R

SP301, SP302

SO308F01

AMP L/R

SOUND AMP IC

IC301

LA42052-E

LVDS DATA/CLK

LCD PANEL

V2801

M156B1-L02

F-8

G-1

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

DVD MT (TOP SIDE)

C2341

C4016

C4013

C4018

C4009

B4008

DMG097A

C2340

CP2301_1

C2329

CP2302

C2316

C4002

IC4001

C4023

R2360

C4024

C4025

C4083

C4058

157

105

C2328

C4085

R4001

C4034

W836

R4012

R4042

C4035

B4015

C4069

R4071

R8517

R8521

R8523

R8522

R4009

C4038

D8510

B4006

C4030

C8542

R2319

R2327

R2326

C4075

R2305

CP2303

R2321

R2320

R2302

C2365

R8530

R8532

R8534

C8532

C8534

C2303

R2304

R2303

C2302

C2310

C8513

IC8501

C8533

C8531

R8529

R8533

R8531

C8525

C8516

C2307

C8517

C8515

C8539

C8538

B8501

C8518

C8519

CP8501

R8528

C8528

C8527

R8527

DVD MT (BOTTOM SIDE)

C2360

C2319

C2358

C2357

C2359

B8502

R8506

C8521

B8504

R2350

B4002

C4076

R2342

R2349

R2352

C2330

C8503

C8501

R8509

R2355

C2339

C2321

R2353

R2309

W803

R2328

C2331

R2307

C2306

R2358

R2357

C2305

C2304 R2313

D2303

R2324

C4037

C4011

C2323

B4003

W807

R4002

R4003

C4007

C2350

C4086

C2309

C4059

R4019

R4018

C2326

W813

C4004

C4055

R4004

R2335

R2336

R2334

C2317

W812

R4043

R4022

R4063

C4001

R2332

R2333

R4062

C4057

R4061

C4003

C4056

R4060

R4005

C4028

C4079

R4086

R4045

R4078

C4060 C4039

C2301

D2304

R2339

C8512

R4016

C4051

C4005

C4054

C4044

R4089

R4052

R4065

R4087

C4027

C4081

W860

C4052

R4032

C4032

R4024

R4014 W841

R8508

R8507

R8537

C8506

C4049

R4067

C4040

R8516

R4036

R4037

R4038

R4048

C4041

R8539

B8503

R8535

C8537

C8543

C8536

R8536

W824

C4026

IC4005

R2341

R2340

R4023

C4033

C4008

IC4007

R4054

C4077

C4095

R4053

DMG097A

C4036

C4050

C4045 C4046 C4047

G-2

G-3

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

DIGITAL (TOP SIDE)

W847

CP3002

CP3001

C6581

C6579

C6568

C6580

B4302

C4306

R4310

C6570

C6553

C6571

C6584

R6501

R6502

B6556

B3008

R3010

C3004

R3002

Q3009

Q3005

J4301

C4303

Q4301

R4307

B4301

W826

IC3007

CP2804

X2801

X2802

R2806

C2880

NR2811

NR2810

A21

R2900

C2925

C2940

C2937

C2932

C2931

W848

C2929

R2837

C2933

C2944

C2936

C2947

C2918

AA1

B6552

AA21

R2823

R5807

R5823

R5822

R5821

R5817

C5847

R5818

B6553

C5821 C5822

NR2808

NR2807

R2824

R2827

C6561

C6562

CEH420A

A1 A9

R1 R9

C3026

C3029

C3024

C3031

C3027

R3018 R3016

R3009

C3056

R2852

R3007

CP2803

CP6201

CP2801

W807

TU5801

Q6204

R6215

R6214

R6219

R6205

R6223

CD6203

C5846

L5805

DIGITAL (BOTTOM SIDE)

B3023

B3022

L3002

C5812 C5811

D6205

IC6201

R6204

R6217

C6210

C5804

C5814

L5801

C5841

C5840

C5839

C5838

C5837

C5835

C5834

C5833

C5817

C5830

R5812

R5810

D5804

D5803

R5809

R5808

C5826

C5825

R5813

C5823

C5824

C5818

Q3001 Q3002

Q6202 Q6201

B5802

IC2805

B5804

C3018

R3013

R3015

R3017

IC3001

B2808 B2809 B2806

W809

B2803

C2813

C2815

B2805

B2804

B2807

C2822

C2859

C2852

C2881

C2874

R2836

C2879

C2871

C2872

C2854

C2851

C2850

R2829

C2861

C2857

R2828

C2847

C2843

C2842

C2853

C2846

C2841

C2855

C2849

NR2809

R6569

X6551

R2807

R3631

R3630

R3629

C2903

C2910

C2906

C2907

C2911

C2920

C2908

R5824

R5825

CEH420A

Q6203

IC2804

C2950

R2873

R2872

C2951

R2805

C6551

C6572

C2945

C2938

IC3009

D3006

Q3007

R3041

R3045

R3042

R3034

R3033

B3014

R3032

C3040

R3035

Q3010

C3021

B3004

B3005

R3020

R3022

IC3002

C3014

R3014

Q3003

Q3004

B3017

C6577

C6576

C6574_1

C6575

Q3407

B6551

C6554

G-4

G-5

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON (INSERTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE

D505

CD7005

W013

D518

TH501

R504

D507 C510 C507

T7001

D7001

D7002

D7004

C7030

D7007

W023

D7008 D7005

R7047

R7033

W024

CEH421A

C7602

D7601_1

D510

D508

W810

D517

R529

D516

CD502

W819

C520

R7036

Q503

D523

W015

W019

C512

W018

C535_1

C504

W010

IC502

W008

IC505

W835

R510

R508

HS501_1

R512

C518

D512

D511

Q501

C513

W808

C517

IC501

C516

C307

W806

IC301

SH501

HS301

W833

C311

C310 C522

C511

L503

CP2201

CP501

CEH422A

F501

AS MARKED.

REPLACE

RISK OF FIRE

W822

R8110

CP8101

L501

J8102

J8103

J8104

W820

W823

SW2203

SW

SOLDER SIDE

DED020A

M2602 M2601

G-6

G-7

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON (CHIP MOUNTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE

R2203

R2206

CEH422A

R2202

R2201

R2205

R2204

R8104

R506

R502

R7605

R515

R525

R519

Q7004

Q505

F7001

CEH421A

Q7001

Q7002

Q504

R7001

IC7001

IC503

D7012

C7020

Q7003

Q7005 R7043

R7022

IC7002

D7020 D7019

G-8

A B C D E

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DVD MT PCB)

F G H

8 8

FROM/TO MEMORY

HD0

HD1

HD2

HD3

HD4

HD5

HD6

HD7

HD8

HD9

HD10

HD11

HD12

HD13

HD14

HD15

+3.3V

HA0

HA1

HA2

HA11

HA12

HA13

HA14

HA15

HA16

HA17

HA3

HA4

HA5

HA6

HA7

HA8

HA9

HA10

HA18

HA19

SD_D12

SD_D13

SD_D14

SD_D15

RAMCS0#

RAMCS1#

RAMRAS#

RAMCAS#

SD_BA0

RAMDQM

RAMWE#

RAMCLK

RAMCKE

SD_A9

SD_A10

SD_A11

SD_D0

SD_D1

SD_D2

SD_D3

SD_D4

SD_D5

SD_D6

SD_D7

SD_D8

SD_D9

SD_D10

SD_D11

MEMCS0

SD_A0

SD_A1

SD_A2

SD_A3

SD_A4

SD_A5

SD_A6

SD_A7

SD_A8

JG001

JG002

JG003

JG004

JG005

JG006

JG007

JG008

JG009

C4038 0.01 B

D4005

MA111

BOOT2

BOOT1

DUPTD1

DUPRD1

DUPTD0

DUPRD0

P.CON+5V_D

VDDPWM

(AFEGND)

(D_GND)

(RF_GND)

(A_GND)

R4023

4.7K

HD2

HD10

HD3

HD11

HD4

HD12

HD5

HD13

HD6

HD14

HD7

HD15

HA16

HA8

HA18

HA17

HA7

HA6

HA15

HA14

HA13

HA12

HA11

HA10

HA9

HA5

HA4

HA3

HA2

HA1

HA19

SD_A4

SD_A3

SD_A5

SD_A2

SD_A6

SD_A1

SD_A7

+1.8V

+3.3V

R4054

R4053

C4008 0.1 F

C4010 0.1 F

C4014 0.1 F

C4016 0.1 F

C4013 0.1 F

1.7

3.3

1.0

1.7

2.6

3.3

0.6

1.0

2.5

0.7

2.5

3.3

0.7

0.6

1.0

2.4

3.3

2.8

2.4

2.2

2.5

1.9

1.8

3.3

2.2

1.7

2.0

2.2

1.2

1.9

1.5

0 NC

1.6

1.2

1.6

1.8

0 NC

1.6

3.3

0.7

208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157

MEMDAT(2)

MEMDAT(10)/GPIO(0)

GNDDACBS2

RSET

MEMDAT(3)

MEMDAT(11)/GPIO(1)

MEMDAT(4)

DAC1

VDDDAC

DAC2

DAC3

MEMDAT(12)/GPIO(2)

MEMDAT(5)

MEMDAT(13)/GPIO(3)

MEMDAT(6)

208 VDDP

160 A

VDDDAC

DAC4

GNDDAC_D

DAC5

MEMDAT(14)/GPIO(4)

GNDC

MEMDAT(7)

MEMDAT(15)

207

206

GPIO(9)/MEMDAT(9)

MEMDAT(1)

159

158

VDD1AFE

RFN

XIN

VDDPLL

VDDC

VDDP

205 GPIO(8)/MEMDAT(8)

157 RFP

GNDPLL

RESET#

204 MEMDAT(0) MEMADD(16)

MEMCS1#/GPIO(5)

MEMADD(15)

MEMADD(14)

MEMADD(13)

MEMADD(12)

MEMADD(11)

MEMADD(10)

MEMADD(9)

MEMADD(8)

MEMWR#

MEMADD(18)/GPIO(6)

203 MEMRD#

202 MEMCS0#

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP IC

IC4001

ZR36966ELCG-D-G

5V TOLERANT

GNDC

VDDC

GPIO(48)/DUPRD1

GPIO(47)/DUPTD1

GPIO(46)/DUPRD0

GPIO(45)/PWMCO(5)/DUPTD0

VDDP

IGPIO(44)

GPIO(43)/TDO SSCTXD

GPIO(42)/TCK SSCCLK

GPIO(41)/TDI/NMI SSCRXD

GPIO(40)

MEMADD(17)

MEMADD(7)

MEMADD(6)

GNDC

MEMADD(5)

MEMADD(4)

MEMADD(3)

VDDP

MEMADD(2)

MEMADD(1)

MEMADD(19)/IGPIO(7)

USBVDD

USBDP/GPO(67)

53 RAMADD(0)

RAMADD(8)

RAMADD(10)

VDDP

100 APWM6+/GPIO(14)

101 APWM6-/GPIO(15)

102 APWM5+/GPIO(16)

103 APWM5-/GPIO(17)

104 AIN/SPDIFIN/GPIO(18)

105 VDDAPWM

110 GNDAPWM

111 IGPIO(23)/APWM2+

112 GPIO(24)/AOUT(2)/APWM2-

113 GPIO(25)/APWM1+

GPIO(39)

GPIO(38)

IGPIO(37)/TMS/NMI

GPIO(36)

GPIO(35)

GPIO(34)/RAMCKE/SPDIFIN

GPIO(33)/AIN/SPDIFIN

GPIO(32)/SPDIFO

GPIO(31)/ABCLK

GPIO(30)/ALRCLK

VDDP

GPIO(29)/AMCLK

GNDC

106 GPIO(19)/PWMCO(5)/APWM4+ 104PIN FPCSTRB

USBDN/GPO(68)

USBGND

RAMADD(4)

RAMADD(3)

RAMADD(5)

VDDIP

GNDC

RAMADD(2)

RAMADD(6)

RAMADD(1)

RAMADD(7)

VDDC

107 GPIO(20)/APWM4-

108 GPIO(21)/APWM3+

109 GPIO(22)/AOUT(3)/APWM3-

FOR PLAYER

94PIN STBY_L

FOR PLAYER

GPIO(28)/AOUT(0)/APWM0-

GPIO(27)/APWM0+

GPIO(26)/AOUT(1)/APWM1-

53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104

NC NC NC NC

NC NC NC

1.3

1.1

1.4

3.3

1.2

3.3

1.6

1.8

3.3

R4042 100

3.3

1.8

3.3

R4052 4.7K

R4065 4.7K

R4087 4.7K

R4032 4.7K

1.6

3.3

R4024

1.6

3.3

4.7K

IABCLK

IALRCLK

IAMCLK

R4009

BOOTSEL1

BOOTSEL2

B4001 (10mA)

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

C4007

R4001

0.1 F

390 +-1%

R4078

R4089

W836

C4034 27P CH

X4001

100GT02727

27MHz

C4028 0.1 F

C4035 27P CH

W836 adjust

X’tal frequrcy

C4079 0.001 B

C4051 0.1 F C4091 100P CH

R4016 100

RESET

4.7K

C4027 0.01 B

C4005 56P CH

IRRCV

JG029

C4044

100P CH

D4002

D4003

MA111

C4026 0.1 F

B4006 (250mA)

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

VDDDAC

VDDAFERF

R4067 10K C4053

0.001 B

B4015

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

(DVD-L/CD-H)

(MUTE-L)

C4011 100P CH

C4037 100P CH

B4010

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

R4071 150

C4012

0.01 B

C4096 0.001 B

C4032 0.001 B

C4081 0.1 F

DAC_VIDEO_D

DAC_VIDEO_A

TIN

DVD_CD

DRVSB

TOUT_SW

TRAY_CLOSE

TRAY_OPEN

HOME

SPDIF

APWM_L-

APWM_L+

APWM_R-

APWM_R+

B4002

B4003

B4005

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

(185mA)

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

(120mA)

(21mA)

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

(130mA)

W807

YUV W806

Y/C W807

P.CON+3.3V_D

DAC_VIDEO_C/D

DUPRD1

DUPTD1

DUPRD0

DUPTD0

(D_GND)

(A_GND)

(D_GND)

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

GND

SYS_MUTE

DAC_VIDEO_A

DAC_VIDEO_C/D

RESET

SPDIF

DUPRD1

DUPTD1

APWM_L+

APWM_L-

APWM_R+

APWM_R-

P.CON+3.3V_D

P.CON+5V_D

P.CON+1.8V_D

FROM/TO MOTOR DRIVE

TIN

D4008 MA111

(RF_GND)

(D_GND)

VDDPWM3.3V

TIN_SW

TRAY_OPEN

TRAY_CLOSE

GND

HOME

TOUT_SW

DVD_CD

DRVSB

OPU_A

OPU_B

OPU_C

OPU_D

OPU_E

OPU_F

SPDL_SENS-

SPDL_SENS+

MD_DVD

MD_CD

DVD_LD

CD_LD

SPINDLE_PWM

SLED_PWM

TRACK_PWM

FOCUS_PWM

PCB130

DMG097

1 1

A B

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

C D

DEBUG MODE DEL

RELEASE MODE ADD

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

F G H

H-1 H-2

H-3

A B C D E

MEMORY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DVD MT PCB)

F G

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

SD_A0

SD_A1

SD_A2

SD_A3

SD_A4

SD_A5

SD_A6

SD_A7

SD_A8

SD_A9

SD_A10

SD_A11

SD_D0

SD_D1

SD_D2

SD_D3

SD_D4

SD_D5

SD_D6

SD_D7

SD_D8

SD_D9

SD_D10

SD_D11

SD_D12

SD_D13

SD_D14

SD_D15

RAMCS0#

RAMCS1#

RAMRAS#

RAMCAS#

SD_BA0

RAMDQM

RAMWE#

RAMCLK

RAMCKE

HD11

HD12

HD13

HD14

HD15

MEMCS0

+3.3V

HA16

HA17

HA18

HA19

HD0

HD1

HD2

HD3

HD4

HD5

HD6

HD7

HD8

HD9

HD10

HA8

HA9

HA10

HA11

HA12

HA13

HA14

HA15

HA0

HA1

HA2

HA3

HA4

HA5

HA6

HA7

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

RESET

P.CON+3.3V_D

GND

D_GND

HD9

HD1

HD8

HD0

HD11

HD3

HD10

HD2

HD15

HD7

HD14

HD6

HD13

HD5

HD12

HD4

HA16

MEMCS0

HA0

C4064

0.1 F

C4062

0.1 F

2.5

3.3

1.9

2.5

1.5

1.9

1.2

2.2

2.0

1.7

3.3

2.2

2.4

1.9

1.5

2.9

IC4007

FLASH IC 16M

SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

A16

VCCQ

VSS

DQ15

DQ7

DQ14

DQ6

DQ13

DQ5

DQ12

DQ4

VDD

DQ11

DQ3

DQ10

DQ2

DQ9

DQ1

DQ8

DQ0

DE#

VSS

0.7

A15

0.6

A14

A13

A12

2.5

A11

A10

2.4

A19

A20

WE#

3.3

RP#

3.3

VPP

3.3

WP#

A19

A18

2.8

A17

1.7

1.0

0.7

1.7

1.0

1.7

0.6

1.0

CE# A2

2.4

2.6

A0 A1

C4060 330P CH

C4039

0.1 F

W860

RESET

HA19

HA18

HA17

HA7

HA6

HA5

HA4

HA3

HA2

HA1

HA10

HA9

HA8

HA19

HA15

HA14

HA13

HA12

HA11

SD_A11

SD_A9

SD_A8

SD_A7

SD_A6

SD_A5

SD_A4

SD_D15

SD_D14

SD_D13

SD_D12

SD_D11

SD_D10

SD_D9

SD_D8

RAMDQM

RAMCLK

C4040

0.01 B

C4041

0.01 B

R4048

4.7K

1.0

1.2

3.3

1.7

3.3

1.8

2.3

1.2

1.8

0.5

3.3

1.6

64M SDRAM IC

IC4005 M12L64164A-7TG

A10/AP

VDD

RAS

BA0

BA1

VDD

LDQM

CAS

DQ3

DQ4

VDDQ

DQ5

DQ6

VSSQ

DQ7

VDD

DQ0

VDDQ

DQ1

DQ2

VSSQ

VSS

CKE

A11

VSS

UDQM

CLK

DQ12

DQ11

VSSQ

DQ10

DQ9

VDDQ

DQ8

VSS

DQ15

VSSQ

DQ14

DQ13

VDDQ

3.3

1.0

1.2

0.7

1.6

3.3

1.3

3.3

1.9

3.3

0.8

2.2

1.7

3.3

1.2

3.3

1.3

3.3

1.2

RAMCKE

C4036

0.001 B

C4050

0.01 B

C4045

0.1 F

C4046

0.1 F

C4047

0.1 F

SD_D0

SD_D1

SD_D2

SD_D3

SD_D4

SD_D5

SD_D6

SD_D7

RAMDQM

RAMWE#

RAMCAS#

RAMRAS#

RAMCS1#

SD_BA0

RAMCS0#

SD_A10

SD_A0

SD_A1

SD_A2

SD_A3

B4008

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

C D

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

E F G

PCB130

DMG097

H-4

A B C D E

MOTOR DRIVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DVD MT PCB)

F G

DSM2(06SD)

FROM/TO LOADER

CP2301_1

LD07T2-24ND-03

1 GND

Vref

VCC

GND

LD(CD)

PD/GND

LD(DVD)

GND

T DRV

T RTN

F DRV

F RTN

SW1(DVD/CD)

VRF(RF_OUT)

VR(DVD)

VR COM

VR(CD)

04_6232_105_015_800+

CP2302

OPEN

GND(D)

LD-

LD+

CP2303

04_6232_106_015_800+

6 SW(GND)

LIMIT SW

SLD-

SLD+

SP1-

SP1+

C2350

0.1 B

C2348 0.1 B

C2329

6.3V

22 SJV

C2331 0.1 B

C2328

6.3V

22 SJV

JG015

JG012

JG026

JG014

JG013

JG040

JG025

JG016

JG011

JG010

JG027

OPU_F

OPU_VREF

OPU_E

OPU_D

OPU_C

DVD_CD

OPU_B

OPU_A

DVD/VR

JG034

JG035

JG036

JG037

JG056

TR+

TR-

FO+

FO-

TP2305

TP2303

TP2304

CDLD

DVDLD

R2352

100

R2353

100

TP2309

TP2310

TP2311

TP2312

TIN_SW

C2330

10P CH

TOUT_SW

DVDLD

CDLD

MOT_LD-

MOT_LD+

P.CON+3.3V_D

DVD LD CTL

JG017

Q2301

KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

2.6

2.3

JG019

W813

1.9

CD LD CTL

Q2302

KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P 3.2

3.0

B2305

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

TP2306

(D_GND)

R2349

100

HOME

MOT_SLED-

MOT_SLED+

MOT_SPDL-

MOT_SPDL+

W812

RF_A5V

(RF_GND)

(D_GND)

W803

TRACK_PWM

FOCUS_PWM

R2306

6.8

R2318

6.8

R2332

220

C2340

6.3V

47 SJV

JG018

C2341

6.3V

SJV

R2333

220

R2340

6.8

R2341

6.8

TP2307

TP2308

R2313

4.7K

R2310

4.7K

VC2

R2320

4.7K

R2338

4.7K

4.1

3.2

1.6

0 NC 1.6

39 38

1.6

0 NC 1.6

36 35

0 NC

0 NC 1.6

30 29

1.6

0 NC 1.8

27 26

1.6

0 NC

6.0

3 4

0 NC 1.9

1.9

2.6

2.7

2.6

2.8

3.7

1.7

2.6

2.7

16 17

0 NC 6.0

6.0

1.6

R2325

6.8K

R2328

4.7K

C2315

0.1 F

C2302

R2303

0.1 B

2.2

C2303 0.1 B

R2304 2.2

R2357 1K

C2307 0.1 B

JG057

JG058

R2358

120

P.CON+A5V_D

P.CON+3.3V_D

R2339

1.2K

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

(RF_GND)

(D_GND)

DVD_CD

DVD_LD

CD_LD

GND

OPU_A

OPU_B

OPU_C

OPU_D

OPU_E

OPU_F

HOME

TOUT_SW

TIN_SW

MD_DVD

MD_CD

VDDPWM3.3V

DRVSB

SPINDLE_PWM

FOCUS_PWM

TRACK_PWM

TRAY_CLOSE

TRAY_OPEN

SLED_PWM

SPDL_SENS+

SPDL_SENS-

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

(D_GND)

TIN_SW

P.CON+A5V_D

P.CON+3.3V_D

GND

P.CON+6V_D

M_GND

PCB130

DMG097

H-5

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

C D

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

E F

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

G H

H-6

APWM_R+

APWM_R-

B C

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

DAC_VIDEO_C/D

DAC_VIDEO_A

RESET

SYS_MUTE

DUPRD1

SPDIF

DUPTD1

APWM_L+

APWM_L-

APWM_R+

APWM_R-

P.CON+1.8V_D

P.CON+3.3V_D

P.CON+5V_D

GND

(A_GND)

(D_GND)

FROM/TO MEMORY

RESET

P.CON+3.3V_D

GND

(D_GND)

FROM/TO MOTOR DRIVE

P.CON+A5V_D

P.CON+3.3V_D

P.CON+6V_D

M_GND

TIN_SW

GND

(D_GND)

APWM_L-

APWM_L+

R8506

220

DAC_VIDEO_C/D

C8505

12P CH

L8502

1uHNLV25

DAC_VIDEO_A W804

R8517

47K

R8521

47K

R8530

2.2K

R8532

47K

C8532

47P CH

R8534

15K

R8522

47K

R8523

47K

D E

AUDIO/VIDEO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DVD MT PCB)

DAC_C[U]C_VIDEO

P.CON+6V_D

M_GND

P.CON+5V_D

P.CON+A5V_D

B8501

BLM18PG121SN1D

B8502

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B8504

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

FROM/TO REGULATOR

CP8502 (CP3002)

A2001WV2-8P

GND(M)

P.CON+6V

P.CON+A5V

GND

P.CON+12V

P.CON+3.3V

GND

DAC_A[Y]_VIDEO

4.3

6.9

4.3

6.9

10.9

C8533

16V 10 SJV

C8526

0.1 B

R8529 C8531

2.2K

R8531

47P CH

47K

R8533

15K

C8534

16V 10 SJV

R8539

R8536

P.CON+3.3V_D

1.8V REG IC

IC8502

LD1117AL-ADJ-AA3-A-R

ADJ OUT

1 2

0.6

1.8

3.2

P.CON+1.8V_D

B8503

BLM18PG121SN1D

DUPTD1

DUPRD1

TIN_SW

RESET

SYS_MUTE

SPDIF

W825

W824

D8510

MA111

W818

FROM/TO REGULATOR

CP8501 (CP3002)

A2001WR-14A

SSCRXD/TX

SSCTXD/RX

GND

START_SW

[U]C_VIDEO

[V]Y_VIDEO

[Y]_VIDEO

DVD RESET

DVD_A_OUT_L

GND

DVD_A_OUT_R

ZERO

GND

SPDIF-134

H-7

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

B C

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

F G

PCB130

DMG097

H-8

A B C D E

MICON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

F G H

8 8

W863

W865

3.3

Q6201

2SK3019_TL

3.3

Q6202

2SK3019_TL

SUB MICON

CP6201 A2001WV2-9P

MODE

VCC

CNVSS

RESET

GND

MODE

AT+3.3V

RESET

R6205

33K

R6210

R6206

4.7K

FROM/TO REMOCON

CD6203

E8252002

(CP7601)

POWER ON LED

STANDBY LED

AT+3.3V

GND

REMOCON IN

3.3

Q6203

KRA103SRTK

D5.0V

IR_REMO

AT+3.3V

R6203

10K

OUT

3.3

GND

D6205

MA111

Q6204

KRC102SRTK

3.3

STBY-H

ACCESSORY

BT001

MNAAA(R03)

BT002

MNAAA(R03)

TM101

000-103000530

P201-2476-2

CD501

P201-2476-2

H-9

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

3.3

2.5

3.3

2.8

3.3

DTV_RESET

MODE

3.3

STBY-H

25 KEY_A

MAIN_MICON_TXD

ASEMD0

DVD_POWER

SYS_POWER_H

3.3

EXT_MUTE

AUDIO_MUTE

DISC_IN_DET

REMOCON_IN

EEPROM_SDA

3.3

DVD_RESET 1 MAIN_MICON_RXD EEPROM_SCL

SUB MICON IC

IC6202

R5F21124FP

3.3

3.1

4 5

0 2.8

3.3

C6218

0.1

R6236 4.7K

R6223

100

R6228

4.7K

R6224

4.7K

R6225

4.7K

R6227

100

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

MCU_SCITXD

MCU_SCIRXD

I2C_DATA

I2C_CLK

TO AV SWITCH

RESET_N

TO JACK

AUDIO_MUTE

W807

FROM/TO FLASH

RESET_N

IIC_OFF

ASEMD0

FROM/TO REGULATOR

DVD_RESET

3.3V_POWER_H

KEY_A

KEY_B

AT+5.8V

POWER_FAIL

SYS_POWER_H

START_SW

LV_CTL

AT+3.3V

GND

D5.0V

PCBDH0

CEH420

H-10

FROM/TO JACK

AV3/AV4_Y

AV1_CVBS

AV3/AV4_PB

AV3/AV4_PR

SPDIF

FROM/TO TUNER

TU_CVBS

I2C_CLK

I2C_DATA

FROM SCALER POWER

AD_A3.3V

FROM/TO AV SWITCH

SW_Y_IN

SW_C_IN

MCLK

SDOUT

LRCK

BCLK

H-11

SW_Y_IN

TU_CVBS

AV1_CVBS

AV3/AV4_Y

SW_C_IN

C2946

C2937

C2939

C2938

0.1 B

C2931 0.1 B

C2932 0.1 B

AV3/AV4_PB

C2934 0.1 B

AV3/AV4_PR

AD_A3.3V

C2945 0.1 B

C2925 0.1 B

C2940 0.1 B

C2941 0.1 B

C2926

C2942

0.1 B

C2933

C2943

0.1 B

C2944

C2935

C2927

C2936

0.1 B

C2947

C2957

C2929

0.1 B

R2837

D E

SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

SCALER IC IC2801 R8J66954BG

R2900

10K

1.6

0.8

1.1

1.2

J1 PCVIN

K1 SSIN1

K2 SSIN2

VIN3A

L2 VIN1A

L3 VIN2A

1.7

M1 VREFA

M2 VIN4A

M3 VRPA

2.0

N1 VIN2B

N2 VIN6A

N3 VIN5A

N4 VRMA

1.9

VRPB

VREFB

P3 VIN3B

0.3

0.2

1.6

VREFC

VRMB

VIN4B

T1 VRPC

T2 VIN2C

0.2

3.3

U1 VRMC

VIN3C

LPF

SICL V9

3.3

DVD-H

ROUT

LOUT

I2C_CLK

I2C_DATA

SCLK0(GPIO) AA8

SRXD0(GPIO)

STXD0(GPIO)

3.3

ASW2

QBLCA

J21

3.0

QBLCB(GPIO)

QBLCC(RXD0)

J20

J19

J18

3.0

3.3

BL_PWM

R2846

4.7K

SCIRXD

SCISCK(GPIO)

3.3

R2850

4.7K

C2959

0.1 B

C2965

0.1 B

R2801

4.7K

W855

W854

ASW0

ASW2

LIGHT_CTL

LCD-H

TWIRE_RXDC

TWIRE_TXDC

MCU_SCIRXD

MCU_SCITXD

IIC_OFF

Vss

Vcc

SCL

SDA

EEP ROM

IC2805

M24256-BWMN6TP

3.3

R2856

10K

C2968

0.1 B

R2872

R2873

100K

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

D E F G

TO JACK

LOUT_FI

ROUT_FI

DVD-H

TO AV SWITCH

DVD-H

ASW0

ASW2

FROM/TO FLASH

IIC_OFF

I2C_CLK

I2C_DATA

FROM/TO MICON

MCU_SCIRXD

MCU_SCITXD

I2C_CLK

I2C_DATA

FROM/TO REGULATOR

S1_DET

TWIRE_RXDC

TWIRE_TXDC

LIGHT_CTL

LCD-H

GND

D3.3V

AT+3.3V

PCBDH0

CEH420

H-12

A B C

TU5801 ENG36E18KRF

TUNER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

W878

F G H

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

TU_CVBS

7 7

C5801

6.3V

220 V-S

B5801

FCM1608KF-102T02

R5801

150K

B5802

FCM1608KF-102T02

FROM/TO REGULATOR

GND

D5.0V

TUNER+30V

D3.3V

H-13

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

I2C_DATA

I2C_CLK

3.3

5.0

BUFFER

Q5801

2SK3019_TL

BUFFER

Q5802

2SK3019_TL

3.3

5.0

TO AV SWITCH

TU_AUDIO_R

TU_AUDIO_L

A B

B5804

FCM1608KF-151T06

C5819

6.3V

220 V-S

SIF_OUT

C5817

0.001 B

C5823 0.33 B

C5818 R5813

0.22 B C5824 3.3K

0.1 B

C5825 4.7 B

C5826 2.2 B

R5810 100

R5811 180K

R5812 100

C5827 2.2 B

C5830 2.2 B

5.0

1.7

2.2

1.3

3.5

2.2

3.3

2.2

5.0

BTSC DEMODULATOR IC

IC5801 AN5832SA-E1V

PILOT DET

PLL

VCC

INPUT

SIF REF

L+R REF

SAP DET

NOISE DET

SIF/BB

MUTE

STEREO REF

SDA/SAPID

GND

FOMO

MODE

AGC SW

IIC/PARA

SCL/STID

AGC DET

ROUT

LOUT

L-R RBF

SPE FIL

SPE DEL

SPE TIME

WB DET

WB TIME

5.0

2.4

0.5

2.9

0.5

2.2

2.8

2.9

C5833 2.2 B

C5834 0.033 B

C5835 0.1 B

C5837 0.022 B

C5838 0.1 B

C5839 3.3 B

C5840 0.33 B

C5841 10 C

C D

C5846

56P CH

L5805

0.22uHLQW18AN

W802

W804

W846

W858

TU_AFT

I2C0C

I2C0D

R5821

R5822

R5823

1.4

AA1

ADIN1

SCALER IC

IC2801 R8J66954BG

0.6

1.6

ADIN0

ADVREF0

1.6

Y2 ADVREF1

0.8

AA2 ADVREF2

VSB_ADC

1.0

AA7 IF_AGC

TUNER_IF

2.4

AA5 MCUADIN0

3.3

AA9

SICL0

SIDA0

MCU_ADC

IIC0

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

E F

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

PCBDH0

CEH420

H-14

FROM/TO REGULATOR

D3.3V

GND

H-15

A B

C D

NR3602

4D02WGJ0472TCE

NR3601

4D02WGJ0472TCE

HDMI SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

C D

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

E F

R3629

470

R3630

4.7K

R3631

4.7K

SCALER IC IC2801 R8J66954BG

3.3

J2 EXT_RES

3.3

G4 HDMI_SCL10

3.3

F3 HDMI_SDA10

E3 PWR0

E1 HDMI_XIN

NC E2 HDMI_XOUT

NC C1 PLL_XFC_A

NC D1 PLL_XFC_P

NC D2 PLL_XFC_X

3.3

G3 RX1N

3.3

F2 RXCP

3.3

F1 RXCN

3.3

G2 RX0P

3.3

G1 RX0N

3.3

H3 RX1P

3.3

H1 RX2N

3.3

H2 RX2P

PCBDH0

CEH420

H-16

A B C D E

LVDS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

F G H

8 8

FROM/TO REGULATOR

GND

D3.3V

D1.0V

VDD_PANEL

B2806

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2807

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2808

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2809

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2804

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2805

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2803

HCB1608KF-221T20

SCALER IC IC2801 R8J66954BG

3.3

C15 PLLAVCC_1

3.3

A17 PLLAVCC_2

D14 PLLAVSS

A18 PLLAVSS

1.0

E13 PLLDVDD_1

1.0

B17 PLLDVDD_2

E14

D15

PLLDVSS

1.4

E18 LPFP

D18 REFR

D17 VSS33BIAS

3.3

F17 VCC33BIAS

3.3

E17

F18

VCC33LVDS

1.0

E16

G17

VSS33LVDS

H17 VCC10LVDS

J17 VSS10LVDS

LVDS1OUT0M A19

LVDS1OUT0P B19

LVDS1OUT1M A20

LVDS1OUT1P A21

LVDS1OUT2M B20

LVDS1OUT2P B21

LVDS1CLKOUTM C19

LVDS1CLKOUTP D19

LVDS1OUT3M C20

LVDS1OUT3P C21

LVDS1OUT4M D20

LVDS1OUT4P D21

LVDS0OUT0M E19

LVDS0OUT0P F19

1.6

LVDS0OUT1M E20

LVDS0OUT1P E21

1.6

LVDS0OUT2M

LVDS0OUT2P

F20

F21

1.6

LVDS0CLKOUTM G18

LVDS0CLKOUTP G19

1.6

LVDS0OUT3M G20

LVDS0OUT3P G21

1.6

LVDS0OUT4M H20

LVDS0OUT4P H21

RSDSA H18

RSDSB H19

NR2811

CRA108220JV

NR2810

CRA108220JV

R2800

R2830

CH0_TXOUT0-

CH0_TXOUT0+

CH0_TXOUT1-

CH0_TXOUT1+

CH0_TXOUT2-

CH0_TXOUT2+

CH0_TXCLKOUT-

CH0_TXCLKOUT+

CH0_TXOUT3-

CH0_TXOUT3+

B2800

HCB1608KF-181T20

H-17

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

C D

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

E F

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

FROM/TO PANEL

CP2804

A2006WV0-2X15P

RX3-

GND

VDD+5V

GND

RX0+

RX0-

GND

RX1+

RX2-

GND

RXCLK+

RX1-

GND

RX2+

RXCLK-

GND

RX3+

GND

VDD+5V

V2801

M156B1-L02

LCD PANEL

LVDS

CD2804

CHRU1803

PCBDH0

CEH420

H-18

H-19

FROM/TO REGULATOR

D1.0V

D1.8V

GND

D3.3V

B2810

HCB1608KF-221T20

W809

B2811

HCB1608KF-221T20

C D E

SCALER POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

3.3

L10

L11

L12

M10

M11

M12

E10

E12

K10

K11

K12

3.3

E11

VCCQ33

1.0

K13

L13

M13

N10

E15

J10

J11

J12

J13

N11

N12

N13

VDD

Io_Power

Core_Power

DVDDABC

DVSSABC

VSS

GND

SCALER IC

IC2801 R8J66954BG

A3.3V

D3.3V

D1.8V

AVDDA J4

AVDDB K4

AVDDC L4

3.3

ADVSS F5

ADVSS

ADVSS H4

ADVSS

PLLVDD P4

3.3

PLLVSS N5

DLLVDD T4

3.3

DLLVSS P5

VCC33AD_A

3.3

VSS33AD_A

VCC33DA_A Y4

3.3

VSS33DA_A Y3

VDD33 J3

3.3

VDD33 U4

3.3

VSS33

VDD33ADDA V2

3.3

VSS33ADDA U3

VDD18 K3

VDD18 T3

1.8

VSS18 K5

VSS18 R4

W848

W849

B2815

HCB1608KF-121T20

A3.3V

B2816

HCB1608KF-121T20

B2817

HCB1608KF-121T20

B2820

HCB1608KF-121T20

B2821

HCB1608KF-121T20

B2822

HCB1608KF-121T20

TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

AD_A3.3V

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

C D

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

E F G

PCBDH0

CEH420

H-20

H-21

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

IIC_OFF

I2C_DATA

I2C_CLK

FROM/TO JACK

A_MUTE

FROM/TO MICON

ASEMD0

IIC_OFF

RESET_N

FROM/TO REGULATOR

INVERTER_H

D3.3V

GND

EEP/PC_TOOL_JIG_CON

CP2801 A2001WV2-7P

7 D3.3V

PC_TOOL_TX

PC_TOOL_RX

IIC_OFF

SDA

SCL

D_GND

D3.3V

W827

A19

A18

A16

A15

A14

A13

A12

A11

A10

A20

A21

WE0_N

RESET_N

FLASH_WP

D3.3V

PC_TOOL_TX

PC_TOOL_RX

IIC_OFF

I2C_DATA

I2C_CLK

GND

D3.3V_FLASH

TCK

TRST_N

TDO

ASEBRKAK_N

TMS

TDI

RESET_N

FLASH_WP

ASEMD0

D E

FLASH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

C2807

0.1 B

CP2803 A2001WV2-11P

TCK 1

TRST_N

TDO

ASEBRKAK_N

TMS

TDI

RESET_N

FLASH_WP

ASEMD0

GND

VDD33

JG2801

3.3

R2802

A15

A14

A13

A12

A11

A10

A19

A20

WE#

RESET#

A21/NC

WP#/ACC

RY/BY#

A18

A17

NOR FLASH IC

IC2804 EN29LV320AB-70TCP

10K

3.3

A16

BYTE#

VSS

DQ15/A-1

DQ7

DQ14

DQ6

DQ13

DQ5

DQ12

DQ4

VCC

DQ11

DQ3

DQ10

DQ2

DQ9

DQ1

DQ8

DQ0

OE#

VSS

CE#

R2805

10K

C2806

0.1 B

NEAR FLASH

NR2802

CRA108100JV

NR2803

CRA108100JV

NR2804

CRA108100JV

NR2801

CRA108100JV

RD_N

CS0_N

A17

D15

D14

D13

D12

D11

D10

D3.3V

R2807 10K

R2809 10K

C2808

0.01 B

TCK

TRST_N

RESET_N

ASEMD0

ASEBRKAK_N

TDO

TDI

TMS

SCALER IC IC2801

3.3

RESET_N

E4 MODE0

MODE1

ASEMD0

ASEBRKAK_N

TDO

TDI

TMS

TCK

TRST_N

R8J66954BG

R2810

10K

USB_CS

WE0_N

CS0_N

RD_N

R2811

10K

A12

A11

A10

A21

A20

A19

A18

A17

A16

A15

A14

A13

INVERTER_H

D15

D14

D13

D12

D11

D10

3.3

WAIT_N(GPIO)

WE0_N

CS0_N

RD_N

3.3

A14

A22(GPIO)

A21

A20

A19

A18

A17

A16

A15

A14

A13

A12

A11

A10

3.3

B14 (GPIO)

3.3

D15

D14

D13

D12

D11

D10

A13

C13

A12

C12

A11

C11

A10

C10

B13

D13

B12

D12

B11

D11

B10

D10

C2809

5P CH

C2810

7P CH

C2811

20P CH

PC_TOOL_RX

PC_TOOL_TX

A_MUTE

R2812

1.8K

JG2803

JG2804

JG2805

JG2806

JG2802

3.3

C16

D16

C17

C18

B18

M32TDI

M32TDO

M32TCK

M32TMS

M32TRST_N

1.2

C14

A16

VCNT(GPIO)

XOUT

1.2

B16 XIN

R2813

1.8K

1.2

A15 XOUT25

1.2

B15 XIN25

C2812

22P CH

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

B C

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

D E F G

PCBDH0

CEH420

H-22

A B

DDR_SDRAM IC

IC2802 HYB18TC256160BF-3S

DAA0

DAA1

DAA2

DAA3

DAA4

DAA5

DAA6

DAA7

DAA8

DAA9

DAA10

DAA11

DAA12

1.8

A10

A11

A12

DQ0

DQ1

DQ2

DQ3

DQ4

DQ5

DQ6

DQ7

DQ8

DQ9

DQ10

DQ11

DQ12

1.8

DQ13 D9

DQ14 B1

DQ15 B9

1.8

DADQS0 1.8

DADQS0_N 1.8

DADQS1

1.8

DADQS1_N

1.8

DAQM0

1.8

DAQM1

DACKE

DAWE_N

DABA0

1.8

DABA1

LDQS

UDQS

LDM

UDM

CKE

BA0

1.8

L3 BA1

RAS

CAS

ODT

1.8

1.6

1.8

VSS

VSSQ

VSSDL

1.8

0.9

1.8

VDD

VDD R1

VDDQ A9

VDDQ C1

VDDQ C3

VDDQ C7

VDDQ C9

VDDQ

VDDQ G1

VDDQ G3

VDDQ

VDDQ G9

VDDL J1

VREF

NC6

NC5

NC4

NC3

NC2

NC1

H-23

A B

DACLK

DACLK_N

DACS_N

DARAS_N

DACAS_N

DAODT

DAQ0

DAQ1

DAQ2

DAQ3

DAQ4

DAQ5

DAQ6

DAQ7

DAQ8

DAQ9

DAQ10

DAQ11

DAQ12

DAQ13

DAQ14

DAQ15

D1.8V

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

C D

D E

DDR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

DAQ12

DAQ8

DAQ14

DAQ10

DAQ13

DAQ11

DAQ15

DAQ9

DAQ3

DAQ1

DAQ4

DAQ5

DAQ0

DAQ2

DAQ7

DAQ6

DACLK

DACLK_N

R2825

R2826

5.1

DACAS_N

DAQM0

DAQM1

DADQS0

DADQS1

DADQS0_N

DADQS1_N

R2827

1.8

M18

L19

N21

K21

M21

Y14

W15

V14

V15

AA16

Y15

AA15

Y13

V11

W11

Y11

V12

AA13

AA12

Y12

AA10

R20

R21

T21

R18

P18

R19

N20

P20

M20

L18

L20

SDDQ0

SDDQ1

SDDQ2

SDDQ3

SDDQ17

SDDQ18

SDDQ19

SDDQ20

SDDQ21

SDDQ22

SDDQ23

SDDQ24

SDDQ25

SDDQ26

SDDQ27

SDDQ28

SDDQ29

SDDQ30

SDDQ31

SDDQ4

SDDQ5

SDDQ6

SDDQ7

SDDQ8

SDDQ9

SDDQ10

SDDQ11

SDDQ12

SDDQ13

SDDQ14

SDDQ15

SDDQ16

1.8

P21

L21

AA14

AA11

N18

K18

1.8

V13

V10

N19

K19

W13

W10

SCALER IC

1.6

W20

W21

SDCLK

SDCLK_N

IC2801

1.8

Y20

V21

V19

Y21

Y19

SDCKE

SDCS_N

SDRAS_N

SDCAS_N

SDWE_N

R8J66954BG

SDODT V18

1.8

SDBA0

SDBA1

AA19

V17

1.8

SDDM0

SDDM1

SDDM2

SDDM3

SDDQS0

SDDQS1

SDDQS2

SDDQS3

SDDQS0_N

SDDQS1_N

SDDQS2_N

SDDQS3_N

SDA0

SDA1

SDA2

SDA3

SDA4

SDA5

SDA6

SDA7

SDA8

SDA9

SDA10

SDA11

SDA12

1.8

U20

AA18

1.8

AA20

1.8

AA17

1.8

U18

1.8

V16

1.8

U21

1.8

Y16

1.8

T20

1.8

Y17

1.8

Y18

W16

1.8

T18

1.8

VCCQ18

VSS

VCCQ18

SDVREF0

K20

1.8

K17

L17

M19

M17

1.8

N17

0.9

VCCCQ18

P19

1.8

VSS

P17

VSS

VCCQ18

R17

T19

1.8

VCCQ18

T17

1.8

VSS U19

VSS U17

VCCQ18 V20

1.8

VCCQ18

W19

W18

1.8

VSS

W17

VSS

AA21

U16

VSS

U15

VCCQ18 U14

1.8

VSS W14

SDVREF1 U13

0.9

VCCQ18

VSS

W12

U12

1.8

VSS U11

VSS

Y10

VCCQ18

U10

1.8

R2823 27

R2824 27

NR2805

CRA108270JV

NR2806

CRA108270JV

NR2807

CRA108270JV

NR2808

CRA108270JV

DARAS_N

DACKE

DABA1

DAODT

DAA4

DAA12

DAA8

DAA6

DAA0

DACS_N

DAA2

DAWE_N

DABA0

DAA10

DAA1

DAA9

DAA3

DAA7

NR2809

CRA108270JV

DAA11

DAA5

FROM/TO REGULATOR

GND

D1.8V

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

F G

C2859

1 B

6.3V(2125)

PCBDH0

CEH420

H-24

(CP8101)

CP4301 TWG-P23P-A1

LOUT

GND

ROUT

GND

AV3_V

GND

AV3_U

GND

AV3_Y

GND

AV1_C

GND

AV1_Y

GND

YUV L IN

GND

YUV R IN

GND

CVBS1

GND

AV1 L IN

GND

AV1 R IN

H-25

B C D E

JACK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

F G H

LOUT_SOUND

FILTER_MUTE

ROUT_SOUND

AV3/AV4_PR

AV3/AV4_PB

AV3/AV4_Y

AV1_C

AV1_Y

YUV_A_IN_L

YUV_A_IN_R

AV1_CVBS

AV1_A_IN_L

AV1_A_IN_R

ROUT_SOUND

LOUT_SOUND

DVD-H

DVD_SPDIF

SPDIF

R6552

100

R6551

100

2.9

DIGITAL AUDIO SW IC

IC6556

TC7PA53FU

B2 SW

3.3

2.9

GND

VCC

3.3

SPDIF_OUT

B6551

HCB1608KF-121T20

R3431

470

D5.0V

MUTE SW

Q3407

KRC102SRTK

5.8

C4301

0.1 B

B4301

FCM1608CF-600T06

R4301

2.2K

D3402

MA111

D3403

MA111

D AUDIO DRIVER

Q4301

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

R4309

5.0

3.2

2.8

1/10W

C4304

0.1 B

B4302

FCM1608CF-600T06

COAXIAL

J4301

RCA-101HT(OR)

W840

A_MUTE

AUDIO_MUTE

ROUT_FI

LOUT_FI

FROM/TO REGULATOR

FILTER_MUTE

DVD_SPDIF

D5.0V

D3.3V

GND

TO AV SWITCH

AV1_Y

AV1_C

AV1_A_IN_L

AV1_A_IN_R

YUV_A_IN_L

YUV_A_IN_R

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

AV1_CVBS

AV3/AV4_Y

AV3/AV4_PB

AV3/AV4_PR

SPDIF

DVD-H

LOUT_FI

ROUT_FI

FROM FLASH

A_MUTE

FROM MICON

AUDIO_MUTE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

D E

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

F G

PCBDH0

CEH420

H-26

A B C D E

AV SWITCH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

F G H

H-27

R6558

3.3K

R6559

3.3K

AUDIO_L

AUDIO_R

R6562

2.7K

R6561

2.7K

C6557 2.2

C6555

16V 10 V-S

C6556

0.1 B

C6559

16V 10 V-S

C6560

0.1 B

C6562

C6561

1 B

16V(1608)

1 B

16V(1608)

3.8

5.0

(1608) 2.5

5.0

3.3

AUDIO_ADC IC

IC6551 AK5358A

AINR CKS0

AINL

CKS1

VCOM

AGND

CKS2

DIF

3.3

PDN

3.3

SCLK

3.3

MCLK

1.2

LRCK

3.3

DGND SDTO

3.3

RESET_N

MCLK

SDOUT

LRCK

BCLK

NR6551

CRA108470JV

R6502

330

R6501

330

R6569

100

100DT01217

X6551

12.288MHz

OUT

3 4

VCC

C6578

1 B

3.3

Lch SW IC

IC6552 MM1501XNRE

4.5

BUFFER

12.0

VCC

4.5

C6570

1 B

16V(1608)

C6565

1 B

16V(1608)

3.3

Rch SW IC

IC6553 MM1501XNRE

4.5

BUFFER

12.0

4.5

VCC

C6571

1 B

16V(1608)

C6566

1 B

16V(1608)

DVD-H

DVD_L

DVD_R

SW_L

6.5

12.0

Lch SW IC

IC6557 NJM2534V

6.5

BUFFER

3.3

6.6

BAIAS

6.5

3.3

SW_R 6.5

C6553

1 B

16V(1608)

Rch SW IC

IC6558 NJM2534V

6.5

BUFFER

3.3

12.0

6.5

BAIAS

6.6

3.3

C6584

1 B

16V(1608)

0/3.3

Y SW IC

IC6554 MM1501XNRE

4.5

BUFFER

4.5

5.0

VCC

C6572

1 B

4.5

C6579

1 B

16V(1608)

C6581

1 B

16V(1608)

C6568

1 B

16V(1608)

C6580

1 B

16V(1608)

C6575

10 C

2125

C6574_1

10 B

2125

AV1_A_IN_L

ASW2

YUV_A_IN_L

ASW0

TU_AUDIO_L

AV1_A_IN_R

YUV_A_IN_R

TU_AUDIO_R

SW_Y_IN

AV1_Y

DVD_Y

DVD-H

D5.0V

B6556

HCB1608KF-181T20

0/3.3

C SW IC

IC6555 MM1501XNRE

4.5

BUFFER

4.5

5.0

VCC

C6573

1 B

4.5

C6577

10 C

2125

C6576

10 C

2125

SW_C_IN

AV1_C

DVD_C

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

B C

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

D E F G

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

LRCK

SDOUT

BCLK

MCLK

ASW0

SW_Y_IN

SW_C_IN

ASW2

DVD-H

FROM TUNER

TU_AUDIO_L

TU_AUDIO_R

FROM JACK

AV1_Y

AV1_C

AV1_A_IN_L

AV1_A_IN_R

YUV_A_IN_L

YUV_A_IN_R

FROM MICON

RESET_N

FROM/TO REGULATOR

DVD_Y

DVD_C

DVD_L

DVD_R

SW+12V

GND

D3.3V

D5.0V

PCBDH0

CEH420

H-28

A B C D E

REGULATOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

F G H

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

CP3002 (CP8501,CP8502)

A2006WV0-2X12P

SPDIF-134

ZERO

GND

DVD_RESET

GND

START_SW

DVD_STATUS_1

GND

P.CON+3.3V

GND

P.CON+6V

GND

DVD_A_OUT_R

DVD_A_OUT_L

[V]Y_VIDEO

[U]C_VIDEO

GND

P.CON+3.3V

P.CON+12V

P.CON+A5V

GND(M)

TO DVD PCB

CD3002

E82O1101

FROM/TO POWER

CP3001 (CP501)

A2006WV0-2x10P

KEY-B

KEY-A

POWER_FAIL

GND

AT+5.8V

AT+12V

POWER_ON-H

S_DET

INVERTER_H

LIGHT_CTL

P.CON+32V

M_GND

GND

AT+5.8V

AT+12V

FILTER_MUTE

A B C D

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

G H

W815

W816

W818

W817

KEY_B

KEY_A

POWER_FAIL

AT+5.8V

POWER_ON_H

S1_DET

INVERTER_H

LIGHT_CTL

TUNER+30V

AT+12V

FILTER_MUTE

LCD-H

POWER_ON_H

DVD_SPDIF

W847

DVD_RESET

R3044

10K

B3022

FCM1608KF-102T02

START_SW

TWIRE_TXDC

(1608)

B3023

FCM1608KF-102T02

W856

DVD+3.3V

MOTOR+6V

DVD_R

DVD_L

DVD_Y

DVD_C

TWIRE_RXDC

R3035

6.8K

SW+12V

W857

MOTOR_GND

AT+5.8V

5.8

LCD+B_SW

Q3006

KRC101S-RTK

SYS_POWER_H

VCC1.0V DC/DC

3.0

R3002

6.8K

LCD+B_SW

Q3005

KRC102SRTK

5.0V REGULATOR IC

IC3007 BD7820FP

5.8

0 for LCD PANEL

5.2

LCD+B_SW

Q3009

TPC6108

5.2

5.8

5.2

B3008

HCB1608KF-181T20

W826

D3006

EC31QS04

VDD_PANEL

5.0

R3032

3.9K

+-1%

0.8

5.8

B3014

HCB1608KF-181T20

Q3008

KRC102SRTK

6.0

G D D

MOTOR+6V_SW

Q3010

RTQ035P02

6.0

5.8

12.0

B3015

HCB1608KF-181T20

6.0

AT+5.8V

D5.0V

AT+12V

12.0

Q3007

KTA1664-Y-RTF/P

SW+12V

AT+5.8V

LV_CTL

AT+5.8V

D3005

EC11FS4

3.3V_POWER_H

R3005

GND

L3005

22uH

TSL0808

D3007

EC11FS4

Q3003

KRC103SRTK 0

Q3004

KRC103SRTK

4.5

3.3

L3001

22uH

TSL0808

R3016

1.8K +-1%

R3018

150 +-1%

0.8

3.3

0.3

VDD CORE 1.05V IC

IC3001

ADJ

VCC

ITH

GND

BD9130NV

PVCC

PGND

3.0

3.3

1.0

GND

5.8

GND

5.8

SW 3.3V REGULATOR IC

IC3009

S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG

OUT

3.3

VCC+3.3V DC/DC

R3022

0.047 1/4W 2125 for CORE

C3013

6.3V

68 CD

C3014

0.1 B

5.8

4.5

1.2

R3020

0.047 1/4W 2125

VDD CORE 1.8V IC

IC3002 AL1015

5.8

VIN

V5/PWON

Vref/SS

EXT

GND

1.2

1.3

C3019

0.1 B

R3024

1.5K

+-1%

R3025

220

+-1%

L3002

5.2uHCDRH104R

L3004

22uHCDRH104R

FROM/TO HDMI

D3.3V

GND (typ 1.8A)

B3003

HCB1608KF-181T20

D1.0V

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

S1_DET

AT+3.3V

LIGHT_CTL

D3.3V

TWIRE_TXDC

TWIRE_RXDC

LCD-H

GND

FROM/TO TUNER

TUNER+30V

D3.3V

D5.0V

GND

AT+3.3V

FROM/TO FLASH

D3.3V

INVERTER_H

GND

FROM/TO LVDS

D3.3V

D1.0V

VDD_PANEL

GND

FROM/TO MICON

LV_CTL

SYS_POWER_H

3.3V_POWER_H

AT+3.3V

KEY_A

KEY_B

POWER_FAIL

DVD_RESET

START_SW

AT+5.8V

D5.0V

GND

FROM/TO SCALER POWER

D3.3V

D1.8V

D1.0V

GND

B3006

HCB1608KF-181T20

B3007

HCB1608KF-181T20

D3.3V

B3017

HCB1608KF-181T20

DVD+3.3V

FROM/TO AV SWITCH

SW+12V

DVD_R

DVD_L

DVD_Y

DVD_C

D5.0V

D3.3V

GND

FROM/TO DDR

D1.8V

GND

1.8V_REGULATOR IC

IC3003

PQ035ZN1HZPH V_IN

V_OUT V_ADJ

6 4

GND

IC L3003

22uH

TSL0808

(DDR2:typ 1095mA)

D1.8V

FROM/TO JACK

D3.3V

D5.0V

DVD_SPDIF

FILTER_MUTE

GND

5.8

Q3002

KRA101SRTK

3.3

5.8

Q3001

KRC102SRTK

POWER_ON_H

D3.3V

R3007

330

R3015

6.8K

+-1%

R3017

150

+-1%

GND

PCBDH0

CEH420

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

H-29 H-30

A B C D E

POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(POWER PCB)

F G H

J501

CCT2302-0901C

F501

51MS040L

FH501

EYF-52BCY

4A125V

FH502

EYF-52BCY

4A 125V

R502

150

W808

COIL,LINE FILTER

L501

SS24H-10100

W810

SWITCHING

Q501

STF10NK50Z

169.0

20.0

S 1.8

R544 2 1/4W +-1%

(21-25)

R545 2 1/4W +-1%

(21-25)

R546 2 1/4W +-1%

(21-25)

R547 2 1/4W +-1%

D508

RM11C-EIC

D507

RM11C-EIC

D510

RM11C-EIC

D518

RM11C-EIC

TH501

5D2-08LCS

B501

W4BRH3.5X6X1.0

169.0

NC 2

169.0

T501

SMALL

81240018

12.0

5.8

12.0

D515

FCHS10A08

D523

FCQ10A04

D516

1H3-E

INV+B

INV_GND

POWER_ON_H

INV_SGND

C520

50V 4.7

MHE_P

D517

MTZJ12B

Q503

KRA103MAT

12.0

Q504

KRC103SRTK

3.0

R529

2.2K 1/4W

L503

22uH

TSL0808

HS502_1

763WSA0068

5.8

4.0

POWER FAIL SW

Q505

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

R535

8.2K

12.0

DC-DC CONVERTER

IC503

LA5797M-TE-L-E

V_IN VRET

EN CPOUT

NC GND

NC NC FB

1.3

C538

25V 0.15

C539

25V 0.15

D520

MA111

D519

MA111

D522

MA111

D521

MA111

R536 R543

220K +-1% 22K

C543_1 1 B 50V(21-25)

L504

10uH

TSL0808

P.CON+32V

AT+12V

AT+5.8V

W840

GND

M_GND

W835

POWER_FAIL

SOUND+B

FROM/TO BACKLIGHT INVERTER

POWER_ON_H

INV+B

INV_GND

LIGHT_CTL

INVERTER_H

INV_SGND

GND

FROM/TO SOUND AMP

POWER_ON_H

SOUND+B

SOUND_GND

FILTER_MUTE

GND

FROM/TO JACK OUT

S_DET

GND

H-31

4A 125V

5.7

2.8

1.8

POWER CONTORL

IC501

FA5531P-A2

ZCD VH

169.0

GND

VCC

21.0

OUT

21.3

CAUTION: IS THE LIVE CONNECTION

CAUTION

:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,

REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE

4A 125V (F501)

ATTENTION

:POUR UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE

N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE

4A 125V (F501)

A B

D514

RU3AM-EIC

SOUND_GND

R511

33 1/4W

HS501_1

763WSA0068

C517

330P B

D511

1H3-E

C521

0.1 B

R517

R519

10K

2.8

FEED BACK

IC505

PS2561AL1-1-V(W)

12.0

11.0

SH501

YQ-12

REGULATOR

IC502

KIA431A-AT

C A

3 2

11.0

REF

2.5

FROM/TO JACK/OUT

CD502 (CP2201)

E8231001

GND

KEY-B

KEY-A

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

NOTE: THE RESISTOR MARKED F IS FUSE RESISTOR.

THE ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR MARKED NP

IS NON POLAR ONE.

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

FILTER_MUTE

AT+12V

M_GND

P.CON+32V

LIGHT_CTL

INVERTER_H

S_DET

POWER_ON_H

AT+5.8V

KEY-B

KEY-A

GND

POWER_FAIL

KEY-A

KEY-B

FROM/TO REGULATOR

CP501 (CP3001)

A2006WV0-2X10P

FILTER_MUTE

AT+12V

AT+5.8V

GND

M_GND

P.CON+32V

LIGHT_CTL

INVERTER_H

S_DET

POWER_ON-H 12

AT+12V

AT+5.8V

GND

POWER_FAIL

KEY-A

KEY-B

PCB240

CEH421

TO/USA

CD3001

E82K1701

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

G H

H-32

A B C G H D E

BACKLIGHT INVERTER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(POWER PCB)

HIGH VOLTAGE

FROM/TO POWER

INV+B

F7001

1206FA5A-T

5A 32V

INV_GND

GND

POWER_ON_H

W809

POWER ON SW

Q7002

KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

12.9

12.2

12.8

R7015

22K

5.9

POWER ON SW

Q7001

KRC103SRTK

FROM/TO POWER

LIGHT_CTL

R7001

2.7K

INV_SGND

INVERTER_H

R7003

4.7K

R7004

2.1

INVERTER COTROL IC

IC7001 BD9882FV-E2

DUTY VCC

R7009

150K +-1%

C7003

330P CH

R7012 1.5

47K +-1%

C7004

220 +-1%

1.3

0.047 B

R7010

1.5

R7007

33K +-1%

R7013

1.7

82K +-1%

1.1

BRT

BCT

SRT

FAIL

PGND

SCP

INV GND SS

FB REG

12.8

3.1

0.1

COMP

1.5

STB

5.1

C7011

25V

C7008

0.47 B

C7009

0.1 B

C7010

0.1 B

C7012

0.01 B

R7017 R7019

10K

R7018

10K

R7014

15K 1/4W

R7008

47K

R7011

100K 1/4W

R7024

R7023

3.7

FEED BACK

Q7003

2SK3018T106

D7003

1SS133

R7035

22 1/4W

D7006

1SS133

R7036

22 1/4W

D7012

MA111

R7056

4.7K

2.6

Q7005 FSS275-TL-E

S D 12.4

0 S D 12.4

0 S

D 12.4

2.6

Q7004 FSS275-TL-E

S D 12.4

0 S D 12.4

0 S

D 12.4

R7047

4.7K 1/4W

12.4

12.6

12.4

T7001

8135109G

3.1

D7014

MA111

D7013

MA111

HIGH VOLTAGE

R7049

IS_DET1

VS_DET

INV_SGND

R7050

IS_DET2

CD7005

E82E0604

D7004

1SS133

D7005

1SS133

9.1

4.8

2.8

10.3

2.8

Vcc

4.8

9.1

C7024

0.001 B

R7041

470K

D7008

1SS133

IS_DET2

9.1

4.8

GND

2.8

4.8

9.1

D7001

1SS133

D7002

1SS133

R7042

470K

C7021

0.001 B

D7007

1SS133

IS_DET1

HIGH VOLTAGE

CN1

CN2

PCB240

CEH421

H-33

5A 32V

CAUTION

:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,

REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE

5A 32V(F7001)

ATTENTION

:POUR UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE

N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE

5A 32V(F7001)

A B

CAUTION

:F7001 IS MANUFACTURED BY SKYGATE CO.,LTD., TYPE 20N.

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

C D

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

E F

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

G H

H-34

A B C D E

SOUND AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(POWER PCB)

FROM/TO JACK OUT

LOUT

ROUT

FROM/TO POWER

FILTER_MUTE

POWER_ON_H

SOUND+B

SOUND_GND

GND

W845

R302

2.2K

C301

1 B

C303

1 B

SOUND AMP IC

IC301 LA42052-E

Ripple

Filter

7.4

1.6

IN1

GND

IN2

1.6

STB

1.6

P.P

Vcc

10.3

14.0

OUT2

7.4

GND

OUT1

7.4

R304

2.2K

R305

2.2K

R306

2.2K

R307

2.2K

C319

0.1 B

C320

0.1 B

HS301

763WSA0064

W030

R308

1K 1/4W

R309

1K 1/4W R310

R311

W830

W827

W824

W803

W823

W820

H-35

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

C D E

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

F G

G H

HEADPHONE JACK

J301

PJ-364H

CD301 E8141801

SP OUT R 1

GND

SP OUT L

SPEAKER

SP301

S0308F01

SPEAKER

SP302

S0308F01

PCB240

CEH421

H-36

A B C D E

JACK OUT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(POWER PCB)

F G H

8 8

7 7

FROM/TO JACK

CP8101 (CP4301)

127301123K2

LOUT

GND

ROUT

GND

AV3_V

GND

CVBS1

GND

AV1 L IN

GND

AV1 R IN

AV3_U

GND

AV3_Y

GND

AV1_C

GND

AV1_Y

GND

YUV L IN

GND

YUV R IN

FROM/TO POWER

GND

S_DET

TO SOUND AMP

LOUT

ROUT

LOUT

ROUT

AV3_V/AV1_C[J]

AV3_U/AV1_Y[J]

AV3_Y

AV1_C

AV1_Y/CBVS1[J]

YUV_L_IN

YUV_R_IN

CVBS1

AV1_L_IN

AV1_R_IN

MAIN_GND

W833

R2201

R2202

820

Vout

GND 2

B+

OS7601

KSM-2003TC2P

(OPERATION PCB)

R2203

15K

R2204

5.6K

R2205

5.6K

R2206

820

(REMOCON PCB)

R7605

R7602

100

FROM/TO MICON

CP7601 (CD6203)

A2001WV2-5P

REMOCON IN

GND

AT+3.3V

STANDBY LED

POWER ON LED 5

ST-BY/POWER

D7601_1

LTL1BECBEK5

PCBDA0

CEH423

FROM/TO POWER

CP2201

(CD502)

A2001WR2-3P

KEY_A

KEY_B

GND

PCB270

CEH422

AV3_Y

AV3_U/AV1_Y[J]

AV3_V/AV1_C[J]

R8118

100

R8119

100

R8120

100

S_DET

AV1_Y/CBVS1[J]

R8110 1K 1/4W

R8111 100

AV1_C

R8112 100

YUV_L_IN

YUV_R_IN

R8113

R8114

CVBS1

AV1_L_IN

AV1_R_IN

R8115 100

R8116

R8117 1K

H-37

A B

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

C D

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

E F

COMPONENT_VIDEO_IN

J8102

RCA-341H(NI)-09

W822

S-VIDEO-IN

J8101

DIN-417HA-01

S-DET

COMPONENT_AUDIO_IN

J8103

RCA-228H(3)NI-02

CVBS_AV_IN

J8104

RCA-341H(2)NI-06

PCB240

CEH421

H-38

H-39

A B C D E

SW SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(SW PCB)

CD2301

2H061605

GND(SW)

PICK UO INNER LIMIT SWITCH

FEED MOTOR(-)

FEED MOTOR(+)

SPINDLE MOTOR(-)

SPINDLE MOTOR(+)

PCB640

DED020

SW2

ESE22MH22

M2602

BCZ3B05

M2601

JCV9B12

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

C D E F

H-40

A B

CP2301_1

1 GND

Vref

VCC

SW1(DVD/CD)

VRF(RF_OUT)

VR(DVD)

VR COM

VR(CD)

GND

LD(CD)

PD/GND

LD(DVD)

GND

T DRV

T RTN

F DRV

F RTN

CP2302

5 CLOSE

OPEN

GND(D)

LD-

LD+

CP2303

SW(GND)

LIMIT SW

SLD-

SLD+

SP1-

SP1+

DVD MT PCB

PCB130

DMG097

SPDIF-134

CP8501

GND

ZERO

DVD_A_OUT_R

GND

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD RESET

[Y]_VIDEO

[V]Y_VIDEO

[U]C_VIDEO

START_SW

GND

SSCTXD/RX

SSCRXD/TX

GND

CP8502

P.CON+3.3V

P.CON+12V

GND

P.CON+A5V

P.CON+6V

GND(M)

CD3002

CP3002

1 SPDIF-134

ZERO

GND

DVD_RESET

GND

START_SW

DVD_STATUS_1

GND

P.CON+3.3V

GND

P.CON+6V

GND

DVD_A_OUT_R

DVD_A_OUT_L

[V]Y_VIDEO

[U]C_VIDEO

GND

P.CON+3.3V

P.CON+12V

P.CON+A5V

GND(M)

TU5801

LVDS

CD2804

CP2801

D3.3V

PC_TOOL_TX

PC_TOOL_RX

IIC_OFF

SDA

SCL

D_GND

DIGITAL PCB

PCBDH0

CEH420

SUB MICON

CP6201

MODE

VCC

CNVSS

RESET

GND

CP2803

TCK

TRST_N

TDO

ASEBRKAK_N

TMS

TDI

RESET_N

FLASH_WP

ASEMD0

GND

VDD33 11

F G H D E

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

GND

AV1_C

GND

AV1_Y

GND

YUV L IN

GND

YUV R IN

GND

CVBS1

LOUT

GND

ROUT

GND

AV3_V

GND

AV3_U

GND

AV3_Y

CP4301

GND

AV1 L IN

GND

AV1 R IN

CP3001

FILTER_MUTE 1

AT+12V

AT+5.8V

GND

M_GND

P.CON+32V

LIGHT_CTL

INVERTER_H

S_DET

POWER_ON-H

AT+12V

AT+5.8V

GND

POWER_FAIL

KEY-A

KEY-B

CD3001

CP501

FILTER_MUTE

AT+12V

AT+5.8V

GND

M_GND

P.CON+32V

LIGHT_CTL

INVERTER_H

S_DET

POWER_ON-H

AT+12V

AT+5.8V

GND

POWER_FAIL

KEY-A

KEY-B

CP8101

LOUT

GND

ROUT

GND

AV3_V

GND

AV3_U

GND

AV3_Y

GND

AV1_C

GND

AV1_Y

GND

YUV L IN

GND

YUV R IN

GND

CVBS1

GND

AV1 L IN

GND

AV1 R IN

HEADPHONE JACK

J301

S-VIDEO-IN

J8101

J501

COMPONENT_VIDEO_IN

J8102

CVBS_AV_IN

J8104

COMPONENT_AUDIO_IN

J8103

P201-2476-2

CD501

POWER PCB

PCB240

CEH421

SP OUT R

CD301

GND

SP OUT L

SP301

SPEAKER

SP302

SPEAKER

CD7005

CN1

HIGH VOLTAGE

CN2

V2801

LCD PANEL

COAXIAL

J4301

CD6203

REMOCON IN 1

GND

AT+3.3V

STANDBY LED

POWER ON LED

CP7601

1 REMOCON IN

GND

AT+3.3V

STANDBY LED

POWER ON LED

REMOCON PCB

PCBDA0

CEH423

TM101

COMMAND TRANSMITTER

OPERATION PCB

PCB270

CEH422

H-41

NOTE: THIS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

B C

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

D E

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

F G H

H-42

MICON

20ns

200mV

SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

20us

500mV

10us

0.5V

10us

200mV

20us

500mV

10us

100mV

10us

100mV

WAVEFORMS

SOUND AMP

1ms

200mV

TUNER

10us

0.5V

FLASH

20ns

200mV

1ms

200mV

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

10ns

500mV

20ns

200mV

AV SWITCH

2ms

100mV

2ms

100mV

100

µ s

500mV

200ns

1.0V

MEMORY

100

µ s

500mV

NOTE:

The following waveforms were measured at the point of the corresponding balloon number in the schemtic diagram.

I-1

AUDIO/VIDEO

200

µ s

1.0V

200

µ s

1.0V

µ s

200mV

µ s

100mV

WAVEFORMS

I-2

NOTE:

The following waveforms were measured at the point of the corresponding balloon number in the schematic diagram.

J1-1

103B

103A

103C

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

110

209

109

111

207

108

103

207

104A

104B

125

208

102B

102

102A

102B

207

208

121

115

205

208

205

202

104

PCB130

(DVD MT PCB ASS'Y)

106

107

119

202

208

123

114

208

117

208

117

208

PCB270

(OPERATION PCB ASS'Y)

208

120

PCBDH0

PCB240

(POWER PCB ASS'Y)

(DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y)

205

122

118

208

PCBDA0

(REMOCON PCB ASS'Y)

206

208

116

208

124

113

101G

101D

101E

208

101C

101F

101G

101

101A

101G

112

101B

208

105B

105A

105

105D 203

105E

201

203

202

105D

105F

203

202

204

105E

201

203

105D

105C

J1-2

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

(PACKING DIAGRAM)

127

129

127

133, 134, 135, 136,137,

CD501, TM101

126

130

128

J1-3

132

131

600

DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW

608

601

608

605

703

605

703

602

SW2

CD2001

M2602

603

606

703

701

702

607

604

704

PCB640

(SW PCB ASS'Y)

Do not replace the parts. Because, minute adjustments are needed if this condition is disassembled further more.

If the repair is needed, replace the

DVD MECHA ASS'Y.

705

CD2301

CLASS

GREASE

MARK

NOTE:

Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.

Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.

J2-1

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

106

107

108

109

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No.

101

101A

101B

101C

101D

101E

101F

101G

102

102A

102B

103

103A

103B

103C

104

104A

104B

105

105A

105B

105C

105D

105E

105F

AE009877 7A7080011A

AE009878 708WPD0010

AE009879 702WNA0010

AE009880 702WNA0009

AE009881 713WPA0426

AE009882 713WPA0431

AE009883 761WPA0533

AE003760 800WQ0A046

AE009884 7A7020296A

AE009885 702WPA1420

AE009955 800WQ00122

AE009887 7A7110048A

AE009888 711WPD0768

AE009581 711WPEA001

AE008459 800WQ00105

AE009889 7A7110049A

AE009890 711WPD0769

AE009582 735WPAB101

AE009891 7A7040071A

AE009892 704WPA0117

AE009893 761WEA0039

AE009894 761WSB0072

AE009624 800SRA0002

AE008947 899NAGCL14

AE007710 89900FB118

Description

FRONT CABI ASS'Y

CABINET FRONT

SHEET SPEAKER-R

SHEET SPEAKER-L

GLASS LED

GLASS LED-2

HOLDER PANEL

FELT SHEET

BACK CABI ASS'Y

CABINET BACK

FELT SHEET

PANEL SIDE ASS'Y

PANEL SIDE

SLOT DVD

FELT SHEET

PLATE BUTTON ASS'Y

PLATE BUTTON

BUTTON FRAME

STAND ASS'Y

STAND

FRAME STAND

ANGLE STAND

CUSHION LEG VEB1349-A

CABLE CLAMP

BAND

AE009895 752WSA0728

AE009790 761WSA0679

AE009896 702WPA1421

75006982 706WPAA007

SHIELD DIGITAL

ANGLE MPEG

COVER BACK

COVER CONNECTOR

AE009897 7225490281

AE009898 7230008445

AE009899 7235490100

AE009900 724WND0001

AE009901 724WND0002

SHEET RATING

SHEET JACK

POP LABEL

SHEET PC-1

SHEET PC-2

AE005122 726000A073

AE009597 744WUA0029

AE009784 744WUA0038

AE009902 752WSA0727

SHEET CAUTION

SPRING EARTH-2

SPRING EARTH-3

SHIELD JACK

AE009816 753WUAA017 SPRING EARTH

AE009904 761WPA0532

AE009905 761WPA0534

AE009906 761WSA0686

AE009907 761WSA0687

AE009908 761WSA0688

72782476 800WQ0A100

AE009909 791WHA0171

AE009910 792WHA0759

AE009911 792WHA0760

AE009912 792WHA0766

HOLDER REMOCON

COVER DVD

ANGLE HINGE

ANGLE LCD-L

ANGLE LCD-R

FELT SHEET

LAMIFILM BAG 650*700*0.5MM

PACKAGE TOP

PACKAGE BOTTOM

PACKAGE TOP CENTER

AE009913 793WCD1868

AE009603 794WHA0003

AE009604 794WHA0004

AE009914 J51T0101A

AE009609 JB5ND000

AE007451 J3N51617A

AE007627 J5S10229A

AE009915 J51T0107A

72784217 810B140A0U

AE005675 810923060U

AE009612 8110K3080U

AE007747 814623080U

AE003526 810923080U

AE003524 8109I30A0U

AE009613 8109230A0S

AE004849 8109230A0U

AE009916 8117540C0S

GIFT BOX

HANDLE

HANDLE STOPPER

INSTRUCTION BOOK(TOSHIBA)

POLYBAG,INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION)

REGISTRATION CARD

INFORMATION SHEET(RETURN)USA

QUICK SET-UP SHEET(SPANISH)

SCREW SEMS(B) 4*10 CH

SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*6 CH

SCREW TAP TITE(P) LAMI HEAD 3*8 CH

SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*5.7+4*2.3 CH

SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*8 CH

SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*10 CH

SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 BK

SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 CH

SCREW TAPPING(B0) TRUSS 4*30 BK

K1-1

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No.

TSB P/N Reference No.

! 600 AE009615 A50N01P650

Description

DVD MECHA ASS'Y A50N01P650

601

602

603

604

605

606

607

608

701

702

703

704

705

CD2001

CD2301

M2602

PCB640

SW2

AE008499 92SBB0033A

AE005815 92AAA0017A

AE003551 92P100088A

AE005805 92P100117A

AE008500 92P200017A

AE008501 92P200018A

AE005816 92P100116A

BZ710149 800WFAA008

AE005817 92P700007A

AE003554 814011723U

AE003555 816112080U

AE005006 813381750U

AE003557 811022080U

AE009434 12C14O1602

AE003558 122H062102

AE009616 1515T98006

AE008503 A5X002C640

AE001158 0500101036

LOADER SUB ASS'Y DLM1D29-31

FEED RACK ASS'Y

GEAR,MOTOR

GEAR,MIDDLE

INSULATOR, F

INSULATOR, R

GEAR,FEED

CUSHION C

SCREW,GEAR FEED

SCREW,PAN M1.7*2.3 P3 CH

SEMS.TAP TITE(P) PAN W10 2*8 CH

SCREW,T-TITE(B)CAMERA PAN M1.7*5.0 P3 CH

SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2*8 CH

CORD JUMPER FFC05241600408T1-A04

CORD JUMPER 2H062102

MOTOR WRF-300CA-10460A

SW PCB ASS'Y DED020A

PUSH SWITCH ESE22MH22

K2-1

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

! C501

! C502

! C503

! C504

! C505

! C506

! C507

! C508

! C510

! C513

! C514

C518

! C520

! C522

! C525

C7030

C7033

D3005

D3006

D3007

D3402

D3403

D4002

D4003

D4005

D4008

D5803

D5804

D6205

D7001

D7002

D7003

D7004

D7005

D7006

D7007

D7008

D7010

D7011

! D504

! D505

D506

! D507

! D508

D509

! D510

! D511

D512

! D514

! D515

! D516

D517

! D518

D519

D520

D521

D522

! D523

D526

D2303

D2304

D3004

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No.

! R503

! R505

! R506

! R509

! R510

! R512

! R544

! R545

! R546

! R547

! R3019

Description

RESISTORS

75006901 RC31X1126J

AE009485 R63884330J

AE002150 R803R9333J

AE009486 RC31X1125J

AE005735 R63881R22J

AD301018 R002T2104J

AE009808 R861R42R0F

AE009917 R808R9123J

R,FUSE

CAPACITORS

AE001725 CS0PB0413K

AE009490 E8E52C271D

79091384 CS0PCH4L2J

AE009918 E83YF1222D CE

AE001732 CS0PCH4H1J CC

BZ110025 P2122B224M CMP

AD301026 CD39E0M13M CC

BZ110035 P2122B104M CMP

AD301026 CD39E0M13M CC

BZ110176 C03L0R7Q2K CC

AE000308 CD39B0MQ2K CC

AE009492 P332E4223J CPP

AE009919 E7ESU54R7M CE

AE009920 E83YF2102D CE

AE009920 E83YF2102D

AE009700 C234SLB11J

BZ410031 D6CE24110A

DIODES

DIODE VARISTA

BZ410085 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON

D7012

D7013

D7014

D7015

D7017

D7018

D7019

D7020

AE008906 D28R11FS20 DIODE

BZ410062 D2WTRM11C0 DIODE SILICON

AE009494 DE7RB3302B DIODE ZENER

BZ410062 D2WTRM11C0 DIODE SILICON

AE008319 D4AT01H3E0 DIODE RECTIFIER

AE002133 D2BXARS010 DIODE SILICON

BZ410126 D2WXRU3AM0 DIODE SILICON

AE009803 D28A10A080 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER

AE008319 D4AT01H3E0

AD300070 D97U01201B

DIODE RECTIFIER

DIODE,ZENER

BZ410062 D2WTRM11C0 DIODE SILICON

AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON

AE009829 D28A10A040 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER

BZ410113 D97U02201B DIODE ZENER

AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON

AE004643 D28R1QS040 DIODE

AE009496 D28R11FS40

AE004643 D28R1QS040

AE009496 D28R11FS40

DIODE SCHOTTKY

DIODE

DIODE SCHOTTKY

AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON

BZ410006 D1VT001330

DIODE,SILICON

BZ410006 D1VT001330

DIODE,SILICON

AE004795 DE7RB5R62B DIODE ZENER

AE009922 DE7RB3R92B DIODE ZENER

DIODES

AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON

BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON

AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON

ENE241D-10A-Q6

1N4005-EIC

EC11FS2-TE12L

RM11C-EIC

UDZSNP33B TE-17

RM11C-EIC

1H3-E

SARS01-V1

RU3AM-EIC

FCHS10A08

1H3-E

MTZJ12B T-77

RM11C-EIC

MA111-(TX)

FCQ10A04

MTZJ22B T-77

MA111-(TX)

EC31QS04-TE12L

EC11FS4-TE12L

EC31QS04-TE12L

EC11FS4-TE12L

MA111-(TX)

1SS133T-77

UDZSNP5.6B TE-17

UDZSNP3.9B TE-17

12M OHM 1W

33 OHM 1/4W

33K OHM 1/16W

1.2M OHM 1W

0.22 OHM 1W

100K OHM 1/2W

2 OHM 1/4W

12K OHM 1/16W

0.001 UF 50V B

270 UF 200V

330 PF 50V CH

2200 UF 10V

22 PF 50V CH

0.22 UF 275V ECQUL

0.001 UF 250V

0.1 UF 275V ECQUL

0.001 UF 250V

470 PF 2KV R

470 PF 250V

0.022 UF 400V

4.7 UF 50V

1000 UF 16V

10 PF 6KV SL

MA111-(TX)

1SS133T-77

MA111-(TX)

K3-1

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

! L501

L503

L504

L3001

L3002

L3003

L3004

L3005

L5801

L5805

L8501

L8502

! T501

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No.

Description

DIODES

AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON D7023

D7024

D7601

D8510

AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON

AE009923 0021E91030 LED

AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON

! Q501

Q503

Q504

Q505

Q2301

Q2302

Q3001

Q3002

Q3003

Q3004

Q3005

Q3006

! Q3007

Q3008

! Q3009

! Q3010

! Q3011

Q3407

Q4301

Q5801

Q5802

Q6201

Q6202

Q6203

Q6204

Q7001

! Q7002

Q7003

! IC301

! IC501

! IC502

! IC503

! IC505

! IC2301

IC2801

IC2802

IC2804

IC2805

! IC3001

! IC3002

! IC3003

! IC3007

! IC3009

IC4001

IC4005

IC4007

IC5801

IC6201

IC6202

IC6551

IC6552

IC6553

IC6554

IC6555

IC6556

IC6557

IC6558

IC7001

IC7002

IC8501

! IC8502

AE008430 I03SP20520

AE009499 ICAD055310

AD302211 I1KJ9A431A

AE009500 I03F9797M0

AE002809 000220002W

AE008194 I03FV65650

AE009656 I56M069540

AE009502 IGGM061600

AE009924 S51T01PF01

AE009925 S51T01PE01

AE009505 I07F091300

AE008435 I1LF010150

AE008916 I0GF95ZN10

AE008431 I07F078200

AE009506 I5HJ0170B0

AE009720 ICQK06966A

AE008324 IF9J0164AG

AE009926 S51T01PF02

AE004647 I01FF58320

79097849 I9UF032290

AE009927 S34L01PM02

AE009511 IC1J053580

AD301988 I0UF015010

AE009928 I55F0A53FU

BZ611139 I0QF02534V

AE009512 I07F098820

AE009513 I0CF0902D0

AE009365 I0QF045650

AE009805 I1YF9117A0

72783392 TJXG10NK50

79097796 TPATC03002

BZ510067 TNAAC05002

BZ510108 TAAA1504SY

AE008330 TAAA1505SY

BZ510071 TNAAB05003

BZ510107 TPAAA05001

BZ510067 TNAAC05002

BZ510071 TNAAB05003

AE005049 TNAAA05001

AE008441 TAAA01664Y

BZ510071 TNAAB05003

AE008933 TJ5MC61080

AE009514 TJ7T35P020

AE008933 TJ5MC61080

BZ510071 TNAAB05003

BZ510109 TCAA3875SY

AE009515 T27T030190

BZ510072 TPAAC05002

BZ510071 TNAAB05003

BZ510067 TNAAC05002

AE008330 TAAA1505SY

BZ510113 T27T030180

ICS

SOUND AMP 5W 2CH

LOW STANDBY POWER IC CONTROL

VARIABLE SHUNT REGULATOR TAPE

CHARGE POMP CONTROL

PHOTO COUPLER

5CH MOTOR DRIVER IC

SCALER

DDR2-667 256M CL=5

MEMORY DATA NOR FLASH 32M BOOT

MEMORY DATA EEPROM 256K 12C

1CH DC-DC CONVERTER

DC-DC CONVERTER CONTROLLER

VO=0.8-3.5V I=1.5A TAPING

VARIABLE REG LOW INPUT IO=1A

REGULATOR VO=3.3V IO=800MA

VADDIS9 MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF-AMP

1M*16*4BANK(64M) 143MHZ SDRAM

MEMORY DATA NOR FLASH 16M B00T

USA STEREO

RESET IC 2.9V TYPE

MEMORY DATA FLASH MICOM ROM16K 2KX2 RAM1

A/D CONVERTER

A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT

A/V SW 2IN 1OUT

A/V SW 3INPUT 1OUTPUT

19WLCD INVERTER IC

QUAND OPERATIONNAL AMPLIFILE

DUAL OPEAMP

VO=ADJ IO=1A TAPING

TRANSISTORS

FET

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR SILICON

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR SILICON

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

FET

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR SILICON

FET

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR SILICON

FET

! Q7004

! Q7005

AE009929 TJ3MSS2750

FET

AE005143 029X000416

BZ310150 02167E220K

AD301785 02167E100K

COILS &TRANSFORMERS

COIL,LINE FILTER

COIL

BZ310150 02167E220K COIL

AE009517 0218MG5R2P COIL

BZ310150 02167E220K COIL

AE009518 0218MG220P

BZ310150 02167E220K

72784092 0216SD220J

AE009260 021AS9224J

AE008874 0216SD2R2J

AE006570 0216SD1R0J

AE009520 0481240018

COIL

TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING

MA111-(TX)

LTL1BECBEK5

MA111-(TX)

STF10NK50Z

KRA103MAT

KRC103SRTK

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

KRC102SRTK

KRA101SRTK

KRC103SRTK

KRC102SRTK

KRC101S-RTK

KTA1664-Y-RTF/P

KRC102SRTK

TPC6108

RTQ035P02-TR

TPC6108

KRC102SRTK

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

2SK3019_TL

KRA103SRTK

KRC102SRTK

KRC103SRTK

KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

2SK3018T106

FSS275-TL-E

LA42052-E

FA5531P-A2

KIA431A-AT

LA5797M-TE-L-E

PS2561AL1-1-V(W)

LA6565VR-TLM-E

R8J66954BG

HYB18TC256160BF-3S

EN29LV320AB-70TCP

M24256-BWMN6TP

BD9130NV

AL1015

PQ035ZN1HZPH

BD7820FP-E2

S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG

ZR36966ELCG-D-G

M12L64164A-7TG

SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

AN5832SA-E1V

PST3229NR

R5F21124FP

AK5358A

MM1501XNRE

TC7PA53FU(T5L,F,T)

NJM2534V(TE2)

BD9882FV-E2

LM2902DR

NJM4565M(TE1)

LD1117AL-ADJ-AA3-A-R

SS24H-10100

22 UH

10 UH

22 UH

5.2 UH

22 UH

0.22 UH

2.2 UH

1 UH

81240018

K3-2

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

B3014

B3015

B3017

B3022

B3023

B4001

B4002

B4003

B4005

B4006

B4008

B4010

B4015

B4016

B4301

B4302

B5801

B5802

B5803

B5804

B6551

B6552

B6553

B501

B2305

B2800

B2803

B2804

B2805

B2806

B2807

B2808

B2809

B2810

B2811

B2815

B2816

B2817

B2820

B2821

B2822

B3003

B3004

B3005

B3006

B3007

B3008

B6554

B6556

B8501

B8502

B8503

B8504

BT001

BT002

CD301

! CD501

CD502

BZ310129 024HT03564

AE008552 024NC51021

AE008878 024HC51816

AE009536 024HC52216

AE009374 024HC51216

AE008878 024HC51816

AE008609 024HC51023

AE008552 024NC51021

AE008395 024HC56005

AE008609 024HC51023

AE008610 024HC51513

AE009374 024HC51216

AE008609 024HC51023

AE008395 024HC56005

AE008878 024HC51816

AE008394 024BC5121J

AE008552 024NC51021

AE008394 024BC5121J

AE008552 024NC51021

AE008217 141U004016

AE009733 06E8141801

AE009538 120Q119905

AE009936 06E8231001

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No.

! T7001 AE009521 048135109G

Description

COILS &TRANSFORMERS

TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING

! J301

! J501

J4301

J8101

J8102

J8103

J8104

SW2201

SW2202

SW2203

SW2204

SW2205

SW2206

SW2207

SW2208

PCB130

PCB240

PCB270

PCBDA0

PCBDH0

AE009522 060R131024

AE009523 064Q1A0010

AE009524 060R401140

AE009526 062R750007

AE009527 060R411058

AE009528 060R431039

AE009529 060R431040

BZ612010 0504101T34

AE009931 A51T01P130

AE009932 A51T01P240

AE009933 A51T01P270

AE009934 A51T01PDA0

AE009935 A51T01PDH0

JACKS

HEADPHONE JACK

JACK,AC

RCA JACK

PLUG

RCA JACK

SWITCHES

SWITCH,TACT

P.C.BOARD ASSEMBLIES

DVD MT PCB ASS'Y

POWER PCB ASS'Y

OPERATION PCB ASS'Y

REMOCON PCB ASS'Y

DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y

MISCELLANEOUS

CORE,BEADS

BATTERY,MANGAN

CORD CONNECTOR

CORD SET AC

CORD CONNECTOR

8135109G

PJ-364H

CCT2302-0901C

RCA-101HT(OR)

DIN-417HA-01

RCA-341H(NI)-09

RCA-228H(3)NI-02

RCA-341H(2)NI-06

EVQ21505R

DMG097A

CEH421A

CEH422A

CEH423A

CEH420A

W4BRH3.5X6X1.0

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

HCB1608KF-181T20

HCB1608KF-221T20

HCB1608KF-121T20

HCB1608KF-181T20

FCM1608KF-102T02

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

FCM1608CF-600T06

FCM1608KF-102T02

FCM1608KF-151T06

HCB1608KF-121T20

FCM1608KF-102T02

FCM1608CF-600T06

HCB1608KF-181T20

BLM18PG121SN1D

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

BLM18PG121SN1D

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

MNAAA(R03)

E8141801

P201-2476-2

E8231001

K3-3

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

EL2401

! F501

! F7001

FH501

FH502

NR2801

NR2802

NR2803

NR2804

NR2805

NR2806

NR2807

NR2808

NR2809

NR2810

NR2811

NR3601

NR3602

NR6551

OS7601

SH501

! SP301

! SP302

! TH501

TM101

! TU5801

! V2801

X2801

X2802

X4001

X6201

X6551

CP501

CD2804

CD3001

CD3002

CD6203

CD7005

CP2201

CP2301

CP2302

CP2303

CP2801

CP2803

CP2804

CP3001

CP3002

CP4301

CP6201

CP7601

CP8101

CP8501

CP8502

CUS151

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No.

Description

AE009937 069S2K0739

AE009938 06CHRU1803

AE009939

AE009940

AE009941

AE008156

BZ614485

BZ614458

AD300752

AE008882

AE009553 06GG2E0019

AD301796 069S280629

BZ710279

BZ614043 124116281A

79101691 081PC04005

AE004626 083LA05007

AE002634 06710T0009

AE009554 11074100M7

AE009554

AE009555

06E82K1701

06E82O1101

06E8252002

AE009942 06E82E0604

AD301795 069S230639

069KYOT159

AE009544 069EV5T060

AE009545 069EV6T060

069S270629

BZ614214 069S2B0629

AE009548 069S2U0739

AE009937 069S2K0739

AE009944 069S2O0739

AE008886 06CK7N0301

069S290629

069S250629

06977NM020

800WFAA006

11074100M7

AE009555 11074270M7

11074270M7

AE009555 11074270M7

AE009556 11074220M7

AE009945 110P4472M5

MISCELLANEOUS

CONNECTOR PCB SIDE

CORD CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR PCB SIDE

CORD CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR PCB SIDE

CUSHION A

EYE LET

FUSE

HOLDER,FUSE

R,NETWORK

AE009557 11074470M7

AE009947 077Q038007

AE009776 126D000045

R,NETWORK

REMOTE RECEIVER

TERMINAL PIN

AE009558 070Y433004

SPEAKER

AE009559 DSQDNE5R0L THERMISTOR

AE009560 076D0LT030

AE009623 0164100027

AE009948 09EV115008

AE009563 100GT02728

AE009564 100GT02509

AE009566 100GT02727

75006971 100GT01615

AE009567 100DT01217

TRANSMITTER

DIGITAL TUNER

LCD

CRYSTAL

A2006WV0-2X10P

CHRU1803

E82K1701

E82O1101

E8252002

E82E0604

A2001WR2-3P

LD07T2-24ND-03

04_6232_105_015_800+

04_6232_106_015_800+

A2001WV2-7P

A2001WV2-11P

A2006WV0-2X15P

A2006WV0-2X10P

A2006WV0-2X12P

TWG-P23P-A1

A2001WV2-9P

A2001WV2-5P

127301123K2

A2001WR-14A

A2001WV2-8P

XRY16X28BD

51MS040L

1206FA5A-T

EYF-52BCY

CRA108100JV

CRA108270JV

CRA108220JV

4D02WGJ0472TCE

CRA108470JV

KSM-2003TC2P

YQ-12

S0308F01

5D2-08LCS

000-103000530

ENG36E18KRF

M156B1-L02

SMD-49 C27000B030

SMD-49 C25000H025

SMD-49 C27000J029

B16000E007

DS0321SRAB

RESISTOR

RC............... CARBON RESISTOR

CAPACITORS

CC............... CERAMIC CAPACITOR

CE............... ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR

CP............... POLYESTER CAPACITOR

CPP............. POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

CPL............. PLASTIC CAPACITOR

CMP............ METAL POLYESTER CAPACITOR

CMPL.......... METAL PLASTIC CAPACITOR

CMPP.......... METAL POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

K3-4

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

1-1, SHIBAURA 1-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 105-8001, JAPAN

Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Toshiba 15LV506-T Television User Guide

Toshiba 15LV505 LCD Television with DVD Owner's Manual

Toshiba 15LV505 Television User guide

Memorex MVD2113 Service Manual

Toshiba 20DL74 Television User Guide

Toshiba 19SLV411U Flat Panel Television User Manual

Toshiba 32D47 Television User Guide

Toshiba 27DF47 Television User Guide

Toshiba 15DL15, 20DL15 Owner's Manual

LG Electronics USA BEJT15DL15A 15"LCD TV / MONITOR User Manual

Toshiba SD-P7000 DVD & Blu-ray User guide

Toshiba 26AV500U Television User guide

Toshiba 20HLK67 Television User Guide

Toshiba 15DL75 Flat Panel Television User Manual

LG Electronics 120S Universal Remote User Manual

Toshiba 20HL86 Television User Guide

Toshiba 20HLK86 Television User guide

Toshiba 20HL67 Television User Guide

Toshiba SD-P7000 LCD TV/DVD Combo Owner's Manual

Toshiba 26LV610U-T Television User Guide

Toshiba 22LV610U LCD Television with DVD Owner's Manual

Download PDF

general specifications

SERVICE MANUAL

15-inch Diagonal LCD TV/DVD

COMBINATION

The above model is classified as a green product (*1), as indicated by the underlined serial number.

This Service Manual describes replacement parts for the green product. When repairing this green product, use the part(s) described in this manual and lead-free solder (*2).

For (*1) and (*2), see the next page.

DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, August, 2008 GREEN

(*1) GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT

Increasing attention is given to issues related to the global environmental. Toshiba Corporation recognizes environmental protection as a key management tasks, and is doing its utmost to enhance and improve the quality and scope of its environmental activities. In line with this,

Toshiba proactively promotes Green Procurement, and seeks to purchase and use products, parts and materials that have low environmental impacts.

Green procurement of parts is not only confined to manufacture. The same green parts used in manufacture must also be used as replacement parts.

(*2) LEAD-FREE SOLDER

This product is manufactured using lead-free solder as a part of a movement within the consumer products industry at large to be environmentally responsible. Lead-free solder must be used in the servicing and repair of this product.

WARNING

This product is manufactured using lead free solder.

DO NOT USE LEAD BASED SOLDER TO REPAIR THIS PRODUCT !

The melting temperature of lead-free solder is higher than that of leaded solder by 86

F to 104

F

(30

C to 40

C). Use of a soldering iron designed for lead-based solders to repair product made with lead-free solder may result in damage to the component and or PCB being soldered. Great care should be made to ensure high-quality soldering when servicing this product

especially when soldering large components, through-hole pins, and on PCBs

as the level of heat required to melt lead-free solder is high.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHILD SAFETY:

15-inch

Diagonal LCD TV/DVD

COMBINATION

OWNER’S MANUAL

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Precautions

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

(Continued)

Notes on discs

Notes on discs (Continued)

Identification of controls

Contents

Identification of controls (Continued)

Antenna connections

Cable TV connections

Connecting to optional equipment

Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)

Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)/

Power source

Auto Setup

To memorize channels

Setting the language

To memorize channels (Continued)

TV operation (Continued)

TV operation

Labeling channels

Labeling video inputs

Setting the V-Chip (Continued)

Setting the V-Chip

Setting the V-Chip (Continued)

CC advanced

Setting the closed captions

Adjusting the picture preference/

Picture settings

Viewing the wide-screen picture formats

Sound control adjustment/

Selecting Stereo/Second Audio Program (SAP)

Film Mode/DNR

Selecting the audio language

Using the aspect feature/

Adjusting the back lighting

Playing a disc

Setting the Auto Shut Off/

Resetting your settings

Playing a disc (Continued)

Marking desired scenes

Zooming/Locating desired scene

Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback

Program playback/Random playback

Changing soundtrack language/Subtitles

Changing angles/Title selection/

DVD menu

Disc status/To turn off the PBC

For (1) and (2), see the next page.